JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 11 14:58:53 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph5/ 55/ cvrtpsp

1990 CPH-5-55

1990 Census of

Population and Housing

Summary Social, Economic,

and Housing Characteristics

Virgin Islands of

the United States

U.S. Department of Commerce

Economics and Statistics Administration

BUREAU OF THE CENSUS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 67 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:02:25 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ ack

The Decennial Planning Division, Susan M. Miskura, Chief, coordinated

and directed all census operations. Patricia A. Berman, Assistant Division

Chief for Content and Data Products, and Lourdes N. Flaim, Chief, Puerto

Rico and Outlying Areas Branch, developed, directed, and coordinated the

1990 Census of the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands).

Other assistant division chiefs were Robert R. Bair, Rachel F. Brown,

James L. Dinwiddie, Allan A. Stephenson, and Edwin B. Wagner, Jr.

The following other branch chiefs made significant contributions: Cheryl R.

Landman, Adolfo L. Paez, A. Edward Pike, and William A. Starr. Other

important contributors were Judy G. Belton, Kimberly K. Giesbrecht,

Paulette Lichtman-Panzer, and Gloria J. Porter.

Data Collection and associated field operations were carried out by the

government of the Virgin Islands through a special agreement between the

Census Bureau and Governor Alexander A. Farrelly. Dr. Frank L. Mills

was appointed Census Manager by the Governor and was assisted by

Gerard Emanuel. The Census Bureau designated one of its employees,

Leon D. Martin, as Census Advisor to provide technical advice and

oversee the data collection activities.

The Decennial Operations Division, Arnold A. Jackson, Chief, was

responsible for processing and tabulating census data. Assistant division

chiefs were: Donald R. Dalzell, Kenneth A. Riccini, Billy E. Stark, and

James E. Steed. Processing offices were managed by Alfred Cruz, Jr.,

Earle B. Knapp, Jr., Judith N. Petty, Mark M. Taylor, Russell L.

Valentine, Jr., Carol A. Van Horn, and C. Kemble Worley. The following

branch chiefs made significant contributions: Jonathan G. Ankers,

Sharron S. Baucom, Catharine W. Burt, Vickie L. Cotton, Robert J.

Hemmig, George H. McLaughlin, Carol M. Miller, Lorraine D. Neece,

Peggy S. Payne, William L. Peil, Cotty A. Smith, Dennis W. Stoudt, and

Richard R. Warren. Other important contributors were Roy D. Ashley, Jr.,

Eleanor I. Banks, Miriam R. Barton, Danny L. Burkhead, J. Kenneth

Butler, Jr., Albert A. Csellar, Donald H. Danbury, Judith A. Dawson,

Donald R. Dwyer, Beverly B. Fransen, Katherine H. Gilbert, Lynn A.

Hollabaugh, Ellen B. Katzoff, Jeong S. Kim, Randy M. Klear, Frank J.

Korpusik, Norman W. Larsen, Peter J. Long, Sue Love, Patricia O.

Madson, Mark J. Matsko, John R. Murphy, Dan E. Philipp, Antoinette J.

Ralston, Maria E. Reed, Willie T. Robertson, Barbara A. Rosen, Sharon

A. Schoch, Imelda B. Severdia, Emmett F. Spiers, and Jess D.

Thompson.

The Housing and Household Economic Statistics Division, Daniel H.

Weinberg, Chief, developed the questionnaire content, designed the data

tabulations, and reviewed the data for the economic and housing characteristics. Gordon W. Green, Jr., Assistant Division Chief for Economic

Characteristics, and Leonard J. Norry, Assistant Division Chief for Housing Characteristics, directed the development of this work. The following

branch chiefs made significant contributions: William A. Downs, Peter J.

Fronczek, Patricia A. Johnson, Enrique J. Lamas, Charles T. Nelson,

and Thomas S. Scopp. Other important contributors were Eleanor

F. Baugher, Jeanne C. Benetti, Robert L. Bennefield, Robert W.

Bonnette, Ester A. Buckles, Higinio Feliciano, Cynthia J. Harpine,

Selwyn Jones, Leatha H. Lamison, Gordon H. Lester, Mark S. Littman,

Wilfred T. Masumura, John M. McNeil, Diane C. Murphy, Mary L.

Naifeh, George F. Patterson, Thomas J. Palumbo, Kirby G. Posey,

John Priebe, and Carmina F. Young.

The Population Division, Paula J. Schneider, Chief, developed the

questionnaire content, designed the data tabulations, and reviewed the

data for the demographic and social characteristics of the population.

Philip N. Fulton, Assistant Division Chief for Census Programs, directed

the development of this work. Other assistant division chiefs were

Nampeo R. McKenney and Arthur J. Norton. The following branch and

staff chiefs made significant contributions: Jorge H. del Pinal, Campbell J.

Gibson, Roderick J. Harrison, Donald J. Hernandez, Jane H. Ingold,

Martin T. O’Connell, Marie Pees, J. Gregory Robinson, Phillip A.

Salopek, Paul M. Siegel, Robert C. Speaker, Gregory K. Spencer, and

Cynthia M. Taeuber. Other important contributors were Celia G. Boertlein,

Rosalind R. Bruno, Janice A. Costanzo, Rosemarie C. Cowan, Arthur

R. Cresce, Larry G. Curran, Carmen DeNavas, Robert O. Grymes,

Kristin A. Hansen, Mary C. Hawkins, Rodger V. Johnson, Michael J.

Levin, Edna L. Paisano, Sherry B. Pollock, Stanley J. Rolark, A. Dianne

Schmidley, Denise I. Smith, and Nancy L. Sweet.

The Data User Services Division, Marshall L. Turner, Jr., Chief,

directed the development of data product dissemination and information

to increase awareness, understanding, and use of census data. Marie G.

Argana, Assistant Chief for Data User Services, directed preparation of

electronic data products and their dissemination. Alfonso E. Mirabal,

Assistant Chief for Group Information and Advisory Services, directed

activities related to the National Services Program, State Data Centers,

and preparation of training materials. The following branch chiefs made

significant contributions: Deborah D. Barrett, Frederick G. Bohme,

Larry W. Carbaugh, James P. Curry, Samuel H. Johnson, John C.

Kavaliunas, and Forrest B. Williams. Other important contributors were

Molly Abramowitz, Barbara J. Aldrich, Delores A. Baldwin, Ramala

Basu, Geneva A. Burns, Carmen D. Campbell, James R. Clark,

Virginia L. Collins, George H. Dailey, Jr., Barbara L. Hatchl, Paul T.

Manka, John D. McCall, Jo Ann Norris, David M. Pemberton, Charles

J. Wade, Joyce J. Ware, and Gary M. Young.

The Geography Division, Robert W. Marx, Chief, directed and coordinated the census mapping and geographic activities. Jack R. George,

Assistant Division Chief for Geoprocessing, directed the planning and

development of the TIGER System and related software. Robert A.

LaMacchia, Assistant Division Chief for Planning, directed the planning

and implementation of processes for defining 1990 census geographic

areas. Silla G. Tomasi, Assistant Division Chief for Operations, managed

the planning and implementation of 1990 census mapping applications

using the TIGER System. The following branch chiefs made significant

contributions: Frederick R. Broome, Linda M. Franz, David E. Galdi,

Dan N. Harding, Donald I. Hirschfeld, Peter Rosenson, Joel Sobel,

and Brian Swanhart. Other important contributors were Gerard

Boudriault, Desmond J. Carron, Anthony W. Costanzo, Paul W.

Daisey, Beverly A. Davis, Carl S. Hantman, Christine J. Kinnear,

Terence D. McDowell, Wendell McManus, Linda M. Pike, Rose J. A.

Quarato, Lourdes Ramirez, Janemary G. Rosenson, Daniel L. Sweeney,

Timothy F. Trainor, and Phyllis S. Willette.

The Statistical Support Division, John H. Thompson, Chief, directed

the application of mathematical statistical techniques in the design and

conduct of the census. John S. Linebarger, Assistant Division Chief for

Quality Assurance, directed the development and implementation of

operational and software quality assurance. Henry F. Woltman, Assistant Division Chief for Census Design, directed the development and

implementation of sample design, disclosure avoidance, weighting, and

variance estimation procedures. Howard Hogan, Assistant Chief for

Coverage Measurement, and David V. Bateman, Chief, Coverage Studies and Evaluation Staff, were contributing assistant division chiefs. The

following branch chiefs made significant contributions: Deborah H.

Griffin, Richard A. Griffin, Michael L. Mersch, and Jimmie B. Scott.

Other important contributors were Maribel Aponte, James E. Hartman,

Alfredo Navarro, and Amy L. Tillman.

The Administrative and Publications Services Division, Walter C.

Odom, Chief, provided direction for the census administrative services,

publications, printing, and graphics functions. Michael G. Garland was a

contributing assistant division chief. The following branch and staff chiefs

made significant contributions: Bernard E. Baymler, Albert W. Cosner,

Gary J. Lauffer, Gerald A. Mann, Clement B. Nettles, Russell Price,

and Barbara J. Stanard. Other important contributors were Barbara M.

Abbott, Robert J. Brown, David M. Coontz, and John T. Overby.

The Data Preparation Division, Joseph S. Harris, Chief, provided

management of a multi-operational facility including kit preparation,

procurement, warehousing and supply, and census processing activities.

Plummer Alston, Jr., and Patricia M. Clark were assistant division

chiefs.

The Field Division, Stanley D. Matchett, Chief, directed the census

data collection and associated field operations. Richard L. Bitzer,

Richard F. Blass, Karl K. Kindel, and John W. Marshall were assistant

division chiefs. Sheila H. Grimm was the director of the New York

Regional Office with responsibility for the Virgin Islands.

The Personnel Division, David P. Warner, Chief, provided management direction and guidance to the staffing, planning pay systems, and

employee relations programs for the census. Colleen A. Woodard was

the assistant chief.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 11 14:58:53 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph5/ 55/ cvrtpsp

1990 CPH-5-55

1990 Census of

Population and Housing

Summary Social, Economic,

and Housing Characteristics

Virgin Islands of

the United States

U.S. Department of Commerce

Ronald H. Brown, Secretary

John Rollwagen, Deputy Secretary

Economics and Statistics Administration

Jeffrey Mayer, Acting Under Secretary

for Economic Affairs

BUREAU OF THE CENSUS

Harry A. Scarr, Acting Director
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 77 OUTPUT: Tue Feb 2 13:31:38 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ all/ rstr

BUREAU OF THE CENSUS

Harry A. Scarr, Acting Director

Charles D. Jones, Associate Director for

Decennial Census

William P. Butz, Associate Director for

Demographic Programs

Bryant Benton, Associate Director for

Field Operations

Bryant Benton, Acting Associate Director for

Management Services

Peter A. Bounpane, Assistant Director for

Decennial Census

Economics and Statistics

Administration

Jeffrey Mayer, Acting Under Secretary

for Economic Affairs

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,

Washington, DC 20402.
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 15 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:04:27 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ allexcph23/ 55/ con

List of Statistical Tables ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- iv

How to Use This Census Report------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- I–1

Table Finding Guide--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- II–1

User Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ III–1

Statistical Tables (For detailed list of statistical tables, see page iv.) --------------------------------------------------- 1

APPENDIXES

A. Area Classifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- A–1

B. Definitions of Subject Characteristics ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B–1

C. Accuracy of the Data---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C–1

D. Collection and Processing Procedures--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- D–1

E. Facsimile of Questionnaire Pages-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- E–1

F. Data Products and User Assistance ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- F–1

G. Maps --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- G–1

CONTENTS

Page

CONTENTS iii
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:12 PM MACHINE: C DATA:NONE TAPE: NONE FRAME: 1

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:06:48 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:06:48 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TOCB78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:06:54

LIST OF STATISTICAL TABLES

[An asterisk (*) indicates that the table was omitted because there were no qualifying geographic area(s) or population group(s)]

Table Page

1. Selected Social Characteristics:

1990 1

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

2. Selected Social Characteristics:

1990 2

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

3. Education and Veteran Status: 1990 3

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

4. Education and Veteran Status: 1990 4

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

5. Employment Status and Journey to

Work Characteristics: 1990 5

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

6. Employment Status and Journey to

Work Characteristics: 1990 6

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

7. Disability Status: 1990 7

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

8. Disability Status: 1990 8

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

Table Page

9. Income and Poverty Status in 1989:

1990 9

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

10. Income and Poverty Status in 1989:

1990 10

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

11. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment

Characteristics: 1990 11

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

12. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment

Characteristics: 1990 12

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

13. Fuels and Equipment

Characteristics: 1990 13

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

14. Fuels and Equipment

Characteristics: 1990 14

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

15. Homeowner and Renter

Characteristics: 1990 15

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

16. Homeowner and Renter

Characteristics: 1990 16

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and Place

iv CONTENTS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 53 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:45:14 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ allexcph23/ 55/ how

HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT

CONTENTS

Contents of the Appendixes -------------------------------- I–3

Graphics --------------------------------------------------- I–3

How to Find Geographic Areas and Subject-Matter Data ----- I–1

How to Use the Statistical Tables --------------------------- I–2

User Notes------------------------------------------------- I–3

INTRODUCTION

Data from the 1990 census are presented in several

different report series. These series are published under

the following three subject titles:

1. 1990 Census of Population (1990 CP)

2. 1990 Census of Housing (1990 CH)

3. 1990 Census of Population and Housing (1990 CPH)

The types of data and the geographic areas shown in

reports differ from one series to another. In most series,

there is one report for each State, the District of Columbia,

Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands of the United States

(Virgin Islands), plus a United States summary report.

Some series include reports for American Indian and

Alaska Native areas, metropolitan areas, and urbanized

areas. See appendix F for detailed information about the

various report series; additional 1990 census data products such as computer tapes, microfiche, and laser disks;

other related materials; and sources of assistance.

The data from the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands

were derived from questions asked of the entire population

and about every housing unit. There were no questions

asked of only a portion or sample of the population and

housing units. Although data were collected on a 100-

percent basis, data products for the Virgin Islands are

separated to include subjects that are comparable to those

shown in the 100-percent and sample data products for

the United States. Appendix F lists the subjects that are

included in the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands.

Legal provision for this census, which was conducted as

of April 1, 1990, was made in the Act of Congress of

August 31, 1954 (amended August 1957, December 1975,

and October 1976), which is codified in Title 13, United

States Code.

HOW TO FIND GEOGRAPHIC AREAS AND

SUBJECT-MATTER DATA

This report includes a table finding guide to assist the

user in locating those statistical tables that contain the

data that are needed. The table finding guide lists

alphabetically, by geographic area, the subjects shown in

this report. To determine which tables in this report show

data for a particular topic, find the subject in the left-hand

column of the table finding guide and then look across the

columns using the headings at the top for the desired type

of geographic area. Below is an example of a table finding

guide.

Tables identified in the table finding guide with a reference letter in parentheses after the table number present

characteristics for racial groups or persons of Hispanic

origin. The tables without reference letters contain data for

the total population only. The table finding guide does not

include cross-classifications of subject-matter items, nor

does it distinguish among tables presenting data for all

persons or housing units and tables presenting data for

subgroups (for example, persons under 18 years or renteroccupied housing units) unless it is necessary to locate the

subject.

Additional information to locate data within specific

reports often is provided in the headnote at the top of the

table finding guide and in the footnotes at the bottom of the

guide.

TABLE FINDING GUIDE

Subjects by Type of Geographic Area and Table Number

[Subjects covered in this report are shown on the left side, and types of geographic areas are

shown at the top. For a description of area classifications, see appendix A. For definitions and

explanations of subject characteristics, see appendix B]

Subject

Virgin Islands Island

Place

Census

subdistrict

By

island

and

census

subdistrict

Alphabetically for

the

Virgin

Islands

By

island

Alphabetically

for the

Virgin

Islands

POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS

Age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

Families and family characteristics . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

Group quarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

Hispanic origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

Households and household characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

Population density . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

Sex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS

Contract rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Hispanic origin of householder . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Meals included in rent . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Persons per occupied unit . . . . . . . 9,10,11,12 9,10,11,12 9,11 10,12 9,11 10,12

Persons per room . . . . . . . . . . . 7,8 7,8 7 8 7 8

Race of householder . . . . . . . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,8,9,10,11,12 7,8,9,10,11,12 7,9,11 8,10,12 7,9,11 8,10,12

Tenure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,10,11,12 9,10,11,12 9,11 10,12 9,11 10,12

Units in structure . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,8,9,10,11,12 7,8,9,10,11,12 7,9,11 8,10,12 7,9,11 8,10,12

Vacancy characteristics. . . . . . . . . 7,8 7,8 7 8 7 8

Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,10 9,10 9 10 9 10

LAND AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT I–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 53 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:45:14 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ allexcph23/ 55/ how

HOW TO USE THE STATISTICAL TABLES

Parts of a Statistical Table

The census data included in printed reports are arranged

in tables. Each table includes four major parts: (1) heading,

(2) boxhead, (3) stub, and (4) data field.

A typical census report table is illustrated below.

The heading consists of the table number, title, and

headnote. The table number indicates the position of the

table within the report, while the title is a brief statement

indicating the classification, nature, and time reference of

the data presented in the table. The headnote is enclosed

in brackets and is located under the title. It contains

statements that qualify, explain, or provide information

pertaining to the entire table. In some tables showing racial

and Hispanic origin groups, the headnote includes information that data are presented only when certain populationsize criteria (thresholds) are met. (For more information on

thresholds, see the ‘‘User Notes’’ section.)

The boxhead is under the heading. This portion of the

table, which contains the individual column heads or

captions, describes the data in each vertical column. In the

boxhead of many tables, a spanner appears across and

above two or more column heads or across two or more

lower spanners. The purpose of a spanner is to classify or

qualify items below it or separate the table into identifiable

blocks in terms of major aspects of the data.

The stub is located at the left edge of the table. It

includes a listing of line or row captions or descriptions. At

the top of the stub is the stubhead. The stubhead is

considered to be an extension of the table title and usually

shows generic geographic area designations and restrictions.

In the stub, several features are used to help the user

better understand the contents of the table. Usually, a

block of data lines is preceded by a sidehead. The

sidehead, similar to a spanner, describes and classifies the

stub entries following it. The use of indentation in a stub

indicates the relationship of one data line to another.

Indented data lines represent subcategories that in most

instances, sum to a total. Occasionally in tables, it is

desirable to show one or more single-line subcategories

that do not sum to the total. The unit of measure, such as

dollars, is shown when it is not clear from the general

wording of the data line.

The data field is that part of the table that contains the

data. It extends from the bottom of the boxhead to the

bottom of the table and from the right of the stub to the

right-hand edge of the page.

Both geographic and subject-matter terms appear in

tables. It is important to read the definitions of the terms

used in the tables because census terms often are defined

in special ways that reflect the manner in which the

questions were asked and the data were tabulated. Definitions of geographic terms are provided in appendix A.

Subject-matter terms are defined in appendix B.

Symbols and Geographic Abbreviations

The following symbols are used in the tables and

explanations of subjects covered in this report:

• A dash ‘‘-’’ represents zero or a percent that rounds to

less than 0.1.

• Three dots ‘‘...’’ mean not applicable.

• (NA) means not available.

• The prefix ‘‘r’’ indicates that the count has been revised

since publication of 1980 reports or that the area was

erroneously omitted or not shown in the correct geographic relationship in the 1980 census reports. This

symbol appears only in the 1990 CPH-2, Population and

Housing Unit Counts reports.

• A dagger ‘‘†’’ next to the name of a geographic area

indicates that there has been a geographic change(s)

(for example, a name change) since the information

published for the 1980 census for that area. This symbol

I–2 HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 54 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:45:14 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ allexcph23/ 55/ how

appears only in the 1990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts reports. The geographic change information for the entities in the Virgin Islands is shown in

the ‘‘User Notes’’ section of 1990 CPH-2, Population

and Housing Unit Counts report. The information for all

States and the Virgin Islands appears in the ‘‘User

Notes’’ section of the technical documentation for Summary Tape Files 1 and 3.

• A plus sign ‘‘+ ’’ or a minus sign ‘‘–’’ following a figure

denotes that the median falls in the initial or terminal

category of an open-ended distribution. (For more information on medians, see the discussion under ‘‘Derived

Measures’’ in appendix B.)

• A minus sign ‘‘—’’ preceding a figure denotes decrease.

The following geographic abbreviations are used in the

tables and explanations of subjects covered in this report:

• A ‘‘(pt.)’’ next to the name of a geographic area in a

hierarchical presentation indicates that the geographic

entity is only partially located in the superior geographic

entity. For example, a ‘‘(pt.)’’ next to a place name in a

census subdistrict-place hierarchy indicates that the

place is located in more than one census subdistrict.

Other geographic entities also can be ‘‘split’’ by a

higher-level entity. The exception is a tabulation block,

which is unique within all geographic entities in census

products.

• BG is block group.

• BNA is block numbering area.

• CDP is census designated place.

Census tables often include derived measures such as

medians, means, percents, and ratios. More detailed information about derived measures is provided in appendix B.

GRAPHICS

Charts, statistical maps, and other graphic summaries

are included in some 1990 census reports. If graphics are

shown in a report, they are presented immediately after the

‘‘User Notes’’ section.

USER NOTES

User notes include corrections, errata, and related

explanatory information. This section appears directly before

the statistical tables in census reports unless graphics are

shown. It presents information about unique characteristics of the report and changes or corrections made too late

to be reflected in the text or tables themselves.

CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIXES

Appendix A—Provides definitions of the types of geographic areas and related information used in census

reports.

Appendix B—Contains definitions for the subject-matter

items used in census reports, including explanations of

derived measures, limitations of the data, and comparability with previous censuses. The subjects are listed alphabetically. In reports that contain both population and

housing characteristics, the population characteristics are

described first, followed by the explanations of the housing

subjects.

Appendix C—Provides information on confidentiality of

the data, allocations and substitutions, and sources of

errors in the data.

Appendix D—Explains the residence rules used in counting the population and housing units, presents a brief

overview of data collection operations, and describes

processing procedures used to convert data from unedited

questionnaires to final 1990 publications and tapes. This

appendix also clarifies the procedures used to collect data

for persons abroad at the time of the census, where

persons away at school were counted, and how data were

collected for persons in institutions.

Appendix E—Presents a facsimile of the 1990 census

questionnaire pages.

Appendix F—Summarizes the 1990 census data products

program by describing the information available in printed

reports and in other sources, such as microfiche or computer tape; and provides information on where to obtain

assistance.

Appendix G—Contains maps depicting the geographic

areas shown in this report.

HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT I–3
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 32 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 11 14:59:19 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph5/ 55/ tfg

TABLE FINDING GUIDE

Subjects by Type of Geographic Area and Table Number

[Subjects covered in this report are shown on the left side, and types of geographic areas are shown at the top. For a description of area classifications, see appendix A. For definitions and explanations of subject characteristics, see appendix B]

Subject

Virgin Islands Island

Place Census subdistrict

By island

and census

subdistrict

Alphabetically

for the

Virgin Islands By island

Alphabetically

for the

Virgin Islands

POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS

Disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,8 7,8 7 8 7 8

Educational attainment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

Family type and presence of own children . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

Income in 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,10 9,10 9 10 9 10

Labor force status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

For persons 16 to 19 years by school

enrollment and educational attainment. . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

Labor force status in 1989—

Weeks and hours worked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

Language spoken at home and ability to speak

English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

Means of transportation to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,6 5,6 5 6 5 6

Nativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

Place of birth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

Poverty status in 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,10 9,10 9 10 9 10

Residence in 1985 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 1,2 1 2 1 2

School enrollment and type of school . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

Veteran status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4 3,4 3 4 3 4

HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS

Bedrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11.12 11 12 11 12

Condominium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Cooking fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Gross rent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

Kitchen facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Mortgage status and selected monthly owner

costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

Plumbing facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Purchase of water from water vendor. . . . . . . . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Sewage disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Source of water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

Telephone in unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Tenure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

Vehicles available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14 13,14 13 14 13 14

Year householder moved into unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16 15,16 15 16 15 16

Year structure built . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 11,12 11 12 11 12

TABLE FINDING GUIDE II–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 2 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 16 16:19:33 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph5/ 55/ usernote

USER NOTES

Additional information concerning this 1990 census

product may be available at a later date. If you wish to

receive these User Notes, contact:

Data User Services Division

Customer Services

Bureau of the Census

Washington, DC 20233

301-763-4100

Questions concerning the content of this report may be

directed to:

Housing and Household Economic Statistics Division

Bureau of the Census

Washington, DC 20233

Population Division

Bureau of the Census

Washington, DC 20233

ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS AND EXPLANATIONS OF DATA

GENERAL

User Note 1

Age Reporting—Review of detailed 1990 information

indicated that respondents tended to provide their age as

of the date of completion of the questionnaire, not their

age on April 1, 1990. In addition, there may have been a

tendency for respondents to round up their age if they were

close to having a birthday. It is likely that approximately 10

percent of persons in most age groups are actually 1 year

younger. For most single years of age, the misstatements

are largely offsetting. The problem is most pronounced at

age 0 because persons lost to age 1 may not have been

fully offset by the inclusion of babies born after April 1,

1990, and because there may have been more rounding up

to age 1 to avoid reporting age as 0 years. (Age in

completed months was not collected for infants under

age 1.)

The reporting of age 1 year older than age on April 1,

1990, is likely to have been greater in areas where the

census data were collected later in 1990. The magnitude

of this problem was much less in the three previous

censuses where age was typically derived from respondent data on year of birth and quarter of birth. (For more

information on the design of the age question, see the

discussion on comparability under ‘‘Age’’ in appendix B.)

User Note 2

The user should note that there are limitations to many

of these data. Please refer to the text provided with this

report for further explanations on the limitations of the

data.

User Note 3

The data shown in this product for persons enumerated

in ‘‘visible in street locations’’ are incorrect and should not

be used. Only the 100-percent data shown in data products, such as Summary Tape Files (STF’s) 1 and 2 and in

the 1990 CP-1, General Population Characteristics State

reports should be used for persons enumerated at ‘‘visible

in street locations.’’

During ‘‘Shelter and Street Night Enumeration,’’ all

visible persons on the streets were asked only the basic

100-percent population questions (age, sex, marital status,

race, and Hispanic origin).

During census processing of sample data, information

from the long-form questionnaire was inadvertently assigned

to a very small percentage of the visible in street population.

User Note 4

The estimated population totals for persons in group

quarters, specifically by group quarters type, that are

based on census sample tabulations may differ from

comparable figures shown in 100-percent tabulations. Such

differences result, in part, from sampling variability which

occurs because information was obtained from a sample

of the population rather than from all persons. Differences

also occur because of nonsampling errors which affect the

100-percent and sample data. Examples of nonsampling

errors include respondent and enumerator errors, processing errors, and nonresponse.

The 100-percent data are the official counts and should

be used as the source for data on group quarters type

when the primary focus is on counts of the population in

group quarters, especially for small areas such as census

tracts/ BNA’s or blocks. When the group quarters population is shown by characteristics covered only on a sample

USER NOTES III–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 16 16:19:33 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph5/ 55/ usernote

basis (for example, education, labor force status, income,

etc.), the sample figures should be used within the context

of the sampling variability associated with them.

For more information on the limitations of 100-percent

and sample data for persons in group quarters and the

classification of group quarters type, see appendix B.

Reasons for the differences between 100-percent and

sample totals will be an important focus of post-census

research and evaluation.

User Note 5

Estimated population and housing unit totals based on

tabulations from only the sample questionnaires (sample

tabulations) may differ from the official counts as tabulated

from every census questionnaire (100-percent tabulations).

Such differences result, in part, because the sample

tabulations are based on information from a sample of

households rather than from all households (sampling

error). Differences also can occur because the interview

situation (length of questionnaire, effect of the interviewer,

etc.) and the processing rules differ between the 100-

percent and sample tabulations. These types of differences are referred to as nonsampling errors. (For more

information on nonsampling error, see appendix C.)

The 100-percent data are the official counts and should

be used as the source of information on population and

housing items collected on the 100-percent questionnaire,

such as age, race, Hispanic origin, number of rooms, and

tenure. This is especially appropriate when the primary

focus is on counts of the population or housing units for

small areas such as census tracts/ BNA’s, and block

groups. For estimates of counts of persons and housing

units by characteristics asked only on a sample basis (such

as education, labor force status, income, and source of

water), the sample estimates should be used within the

context of the error associated with them.

Many users are interested in tabulations of items collected on the sample cross-classified by items collected on

a 100-percent basis such as age, race, sex, Hispanic

origin, and housing units by tenure. Given the way the

weights were applied during sample tabulations, generally,

there is exact agreement between sample estimates and

100-percent counts for total population and total housing

units for most geographic areas. At the State level and

higher geographic levels, sample estimates and 100-percent

counts for population by age, sex, race, and Hispanic origin

and for housing units by tenure, number of rooms and so

on would be reasonably similar and, in some cases, the

same.

At smaller geographic levels, including census tract/

BNA, there is still general agreement between 100-percent

counts and sample estimates of total population or housing units. At smaller geographic levels, however, there will

be expected differences between sample estimates and

100-percent counts for population by age, sex, race, and

Hispanic origin and for housing units by tenure, number of

rooms and so on. In these cases, users may want to

consider using derived measures (such as means and

medians) or percent distributions. Whether using absolute

numbers or derived measures for small population groups

and for a small number of housing units in small geographic areas, users should be cautioned that the sampling

error associated with these data may be large.

Even though the differences between sample estimates

and 100-percent counts for these categories are generally

small, the differences for the Hispanic origin populations

are relatively larger than for other groups. The following

provides some explanation for these differences.

For the Hispanic origin population, sample estimates at

the State level are generally lower than the corresponding

100-percent counts. The majority of difference is caused

by the 100-percent and sample processing of the Hispanic

question on the sample questionnaire when the respondent did not mark any response category. When processing

the sample, written entries in race or Hispanic origin as well

as responses to questions only asked on the sample, such

as place of birth. These procedures led to a lower proportion of persons being assigned as Hispanic in sample

processing than were assigned during 100-percent processing. The Census Bureau will evaluate the effectiveness of the 100-percent and sample procedures.

As in previous censuses, the Census Bureau will evaluate the quality of the data and make this information

available to data users. In the meanwhile, both 100-

percent and sample data serve very important purposes

and, therefore, should be used within the limitations of the

sampling and nonsampling errors.

User Note 6

Data presented in tables 15 and 16 for ‘‘Median selected

monthly owner costs as a percentage of household income

in 1989’’ (With a mortgage), ‘‘Median selected monthly

owner costs as a percentage of household income in

1989’’ (Not mortgaged), and ‘‘Median gross rent as a

percentage of household income in 1989’’ are inconsistent

with the explanations for derived measures in appendix B.

Specifically, when the median falls in the lower interval of

the tabulation distribution, the estimated value obtained by

linear interpolation is shown rather than the upper value of

the category followed by a minus sign (-). The lower

interval has an assumed range of 0.0 to 19.9 percent.

III–2 USER NOTES
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 1

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 1. Selected Social Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

All persons

Born in U.S. Virgin Islands

Persons 5 years and overPersons who speak a language other than English at home

Persons 5 to 17

years

Persons 18 years

and over

Family households

Married-couple

family

Female householder,

no husband present

Total

Percent

foreign

born Total

Percent

born on

island of

residence Total

Percent

living in

different

house in

1985 Total

Percent

who do

not

speak

English

" very

well" Total

Percent

who do

not

speak

English

" very

well" Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years

Virgin Islands ---------------- 101 809 31.3 49 839 93.9 92 579 39.4 4 788 30.7 17 349 29.2 23 012 56.7 13 197 53.8 7 693 63.3

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 50 139 28.9 25 194 95.9 45 403 40.0 3 749 33.3 11 030 31.8 11 201 59.9 6 529 56.6 3 678 66.6

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 3 663 30.6 1 543 95.1 3 398 31.9 161 35.4 826 26.0 849 55.2 603 55.4 178 59.0

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 9 – 6 100.0 8 ––– 3 33.3 2 – 2 –– –

Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 3 199 31.0 1 661 95.8 2 890 44.0 130 25.4 522 32.6 692 55.3 331 52.0 287 57.1

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 2 546 32.4 1 346 95.8 2 286 42.0 104 26.0 410 33.4 541 57.3 255 52.5 228 60.5

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 740 16.4 471 95.1 1 651 55.4 54 24.1 345 13.3 469 38.4 380 33.9 62 61.3

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 4 066 28.7 2 367 95.4 3 632 41.7 234 33.3 681 39.8 848 63.3 327 59.6 435 67.8

Frederiksted town ----------------- 1 064 39.8 466 94.2 985 48.0 60 38.3 275 55.6 211 57.8 106 53.8 85 64.7

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 3 002 24.7 1 901 95.6 2 647 39.4 174 31.6 406 29.1 637 65.1 221 62.4 350 68.6

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 5 495 27.3 2 877 95.3 4 972 36.0 488 26.8 1 316 31.4 1 211 60.0 749 58.2 353 62.3

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 4 828 36.5 2 264 96.7 4 320 30.8 248 21.0 1 046 21.6 1 082 61.2 549 55.6 439 70.8

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 2 655 46.9 1 257 96.7 2 356 25.9 95 12.6 454 15.2 593 68.1 220 62.7 331 73.4

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 11 883 27.1 5 957 95.4 10 773 45.3 797 24.3 2 613 28.8 2 728 55.8 1 675 52.8 833 62.3

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – –––––––––––––– –

Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 7 425 30.0 3 815 96.9 6 624 48.0 886 42.7 1 865 43.6 1 557 71.0 871 68.7 538 78.1

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 7 840 28.4 4 239 96.5 7 143 30.6 751 41.8 1 816 33.4 1 765 63.6 1 044 61.8 553 68.2

St. John Island ----------------------- 3 504 25.2 1 391 27.7 3 219 54.8 74 8.1 398 10.6 769 51.1 495 45.9 204 66.2

Central subdistrict ------------------- 621 16.1 224 26.3 564 80.3 2 – 23 – 146 63.0 88 48.9 51 90.2

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – –––––––––––––– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 363 9.1 220 31.8 321 40.5 3 – 27 33.3 77 41.6 41 43.9 25 36.0

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 2 469 30.3 932 26.6 2 287 50.0 68 8.8 343 9.6 536 49.4 358 45.5 126 62.7

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 2 466 30.3 930 26.7 2 285 50.0 68 8.8 343 9.6 535 49.3 358 45.5 125 62.4

East End subdistrict ------------------ 51 7.8 15 53.3 47 76.6 1 – 5 – 10 40.0 8 37.5 2 50.0

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 48 166 34.1 23 254 95.7 43 957 37.7 965 22.4 5 921 25.5 11 042 53.9 6 173 51.4 3 811 60.0

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 20 589 39.4 10 196 94.9 18 690 39.1 486 23.3 2 735 28.7 4 643 55.2 2 242 53.7 1 911 59.1

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 12 331 40.5 6 106 95.2 11 255 37.0 296 25.3 1 699 29.4 2 767 54.4 1 288 51.6 1 168 59.5

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 2 836 38.8 1 537 95.6 2 526 41.2 76 13.2 275 28.0 647 59.7 289 61.6 296 59.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 5 422 37.3 2 553 93.8 4 909 42.8 114 24.6 761 27.5 1 229 54.8 665 54.4 447 57.9

East End subdistrict ------------------ 5 927 37.6 2 389 96.9 5 471 43.0 102 23.5 806 29.7 1 394 52.2 932 49.0 316 63.6

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 6 404 21.7 2 327 95.4 6 002 49.1 112 18.8 1 027 16.4 1 568 46.4 1 207 46.5 221 53.4

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 4 668 36.4 2 016 95.9 4 218 37.6 141 26.2 688 30.5 1 039 57.0 594 54.0 350 63.1

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 9 084 30.2 5 616 96.5 8 176 23.3 99 18.2 483 19.5 2 018 57.1 940 53.7 924 61.6

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 9 084 30.2 5 616 96.5 8 176 23.3 99 18.2 483 19.5 2 018 57.1 940 53.7 924 61.6

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 172 17.4 8 100.0 169 62.7 2 – 17 5.9 49 18.4 39 17.9 7 28.6

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – –––––––––––––– – West End subdistrict ----------------- 1 322 18.1 702 95.6 1 231 29.0 23 13.0 165 8.5 331 53.8 219 55.3 82 54.9

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 1
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 2

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 2. Selected Social Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

All persons

Born in U.S. Virgin Islands

Persons 5 years and overPersons who speak a language other than English at home

Persons 5 to 17

years

Persons 18 years

and over

Family households

Married-couple

family

Female householder,

no husband present

Total

Percent

foreign

born Total

Percent

born on

island of

residence Total

Percent

living in

different

house in

1985 Total

Percent

who do

not

speak

English

" very

well" Total

Percent

who do

not

speak

English

" very

well" Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years Total

Percent

with own

children

under 18

years

Virgin Islands ---------------- 101 809 31.3 49 839 93.9 92 579 39.4 4 788 30.7 17 349 29.2 23 012 56.7 13 197 53.8 7 693 63.3

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 50 139 28.9 25 194 95.9 45 403 40.0 3 749 33.3 11 030 31.8 11 201 59.9 6 529 56.6 3 678 66.6

St. John Island ----------------------- 3 504 25.2 1 391 27.7 3 219 54.8 74 8.1 398 10.6 769 51.1 495 45.9 204 66.2

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 48 166 34.1 23 254 95.7 43 957 37.7 965 22.4 5 921 25.5 11 042 53.9 6 173 51.4 3 811 60.0

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 3 663 30.6 1 543 95.1 3 398 31.9 161 35.4 826 26.0 849 55.2 603 55.4 178 59.0

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 9 084 30.2 5 616 96.5 8 176 23.3 99 18.2 483 19.5 2 018 57.1 940 53.7 924 61.6

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 621 16.1 224 26.3 564 80.3 2 – 23 – 146 63.0 88 48.9 51 90.2

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 12 331 40.5 6 106 95.2 11 255 37.0 296 25.3 1 699 29.4 2 767 54.4 1 288 51.6 1 168 59.5

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 20 589 39.4 10 196 94.9 18 690 39.1 486 23.3 2 735 28.7 4 643 55.2 2 242 53.7 1 911 59.1

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 2 836 38.8 1 537 95.6 2 526 41.2 76 13.2 275 28.0 647 59.7 289 61.6 296 59.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 5 422 37.3 2 553 93.8 4 909 42.8 114 24.6 761 27.5 1 229 54.8 665 54.4 447 57.9

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 2 555 32.3 1 352 95.9 2 294 41.8 104 26.0 413 33.4 543 57.1 257 52.1 228 60.5

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 3 199 31.0 1 661 95.8 2 890 44.0 130 25.4 522 32.6 692 55.3 331 52.0 287 57.1

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 363 9.1 220 31.8 321 40.5 3 – 27 33.3 77 41.6 41 43.9 25 36.0

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 2 466 30.3 930 26.7 2 285 50.0 68 8.8 343 9.6 535 49.3 358 45.5 125 62.4

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 2 469 30.3 932 26.6 2 287 50.0 68 8.8 343 9.6 536 49.4 358 45.5 126 62.7

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 1 740 16.4 471 95.1 1 651 55.4 54 24.1 345 13.3 469 38.4 380 33.9 62 61.3

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 51 7.8 15 53.3 47 76.6 1 – 5 – 10 40.0 8 37.5 2 50.0

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 5 927 37.6 2 389 96.9 5 471 43.0 102 23.5 806 29.7 1 394 52.2 932 49.0 316 63.6

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 1 064 39.8 466 94.2 985 48.0 60 38.3 275 55.6 211 57.8 106 53.8 85 64.7

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 4 066 28.7 2 367 95.4 3 632 41.7 234 33.3 681 39.8 848 63.3 327 59.6 435 67.8

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 3 002 24.7 1 901 95.6 2 647 39.4 174 31.6 406 29.1 637 65.1 221 62.4 350 68.6

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 2 655 46.9 1 257 96.7 2 356 25.9 95 12.6 454 15.2 593 68.1 220 62.7 331 73.4

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 5 495 27.3 2 877 95.3 4 972 36.0 488 26.8 1 316 31.4 1 211 60.0 749 58.2 353 62.3

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 6 404 21.7 2 327 95.4 6 002 49.1 112 18.8 1 027 16.4 1 568 46.4 1 207 46.5 221 53.4

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 4 828 36.5 2 264 96.7 4 320 30.8 248 21.0 1 046 21.6 1 082 61.2 549 55.6 439 70.8

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 11 883 27.1 5 957 95.4 10 773 45.3 797 24.3 2 613 28.8 2 728 55.8 1 675 52.8 833 62.3

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 7 425 30.0 3 815 96.9 6 624 48.0 886 42.7 1 865 43.6 1 557 71.0 871 68.7 538 78.1

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 4 668 36.4 2 016 95.9 4 218 37.6 141 26.2 688 30.5 1 039 57.0 594 54.0 350 63.1

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 7 840 28.4 4 239 96.5 7 143 30.6 751 41.8 1 816 33.4 1 765 63.6 1 044 61.8 553 68.2

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 9 084 30.2 5 616 96.5 8 176 23.3 99 18.2 483 19.5 2 018 57.1 940 53.7 924 61.6

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 172 17.4 8 100.0 169 62.7 2 – 17 5.9 49 18.4 39 17.9 7 28.6

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 1 322 18.1 702 95.6 1 231 29.0 23 13.0 165 8.5 331 53.8 219 55.3 82 54.9

2 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 3

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 3. Education and Veteran Status: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Persons 3 years and over enrolled in school

Elementary or high

school

Persons 16 to 19 years

Not enrolled in school and not high school graduate

Persons 25 years and over Civilian veterans 16

years and over

Preprimary

school Total

Percent in

private

school College Total Total Employed

UnemployedNot in

labor force Total

Percent

high school

graduate

or higher

Percent

with bachelor’s

degree or

higher Total

65 years

and over

Virgin Islands ---------------- 1 919 26 062 18.7 4 677 7 581 1 269 453 186 628 55 639 56.5 15.1 4 879 738

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 842 13 643 20.5 1 996 3 886 728 209 125 392 26 285 51.4 13.0 2 212 343

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 54 899 40.4 183 261 36 10 4 22 2 148 64.3 19.9 202 37

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – –––––––– 8 37.5 12.5 1 – Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 64 781 20.9 107 188 35 6 4 25 1 826 45.9 8.3 148 29

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 53 632 20.1 74 148 29 5 4 20 1 425 40.6 5.7 114 23

East End subdistrict ------------------ 29 268 57.8 75 77 2 2 – – 1 265 85.7 34.5 232 53

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 83 1 226 9.7 153 335 62 13 9 38 1 906 41.3 9.7 137 22

Frederiksted town ----------------- 19 253 8.7 35 60 12 2 2 8 614 41.0 13.2 44 1

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 64 973 10.0 118 275 50 11 7 30 1 292 41.4 8.0 93 21

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 71 1 470 16.2 195 455 90 19 22 49 2 819 48.0 8.8 218 33

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 78 1 377 15.0 204 362 56 12 12 32 2 438 45.7 12.8 198 27

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 32 894 9.3 102 239 41 7 9 25 1 152 33.2 6.1 54 7

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 214 3 003 27.1 550 921 172 59 26 87 6 490 59.6 16.4 648 91

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – – – – – – – – – – – –– – Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 118 2 237 14.9 256 589 136 44 21 71 3 496 39.0 7.0 150 11

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 131 2 382 16.9 273 698 139 44 27 68 3 897 44.3 8.9 279 40

St. John Island ----------------------- 64 677 12.9 84 181 41 23 4 14 2 232 66.8 25.3 257 41

Central subdistrict ------------------- 15 125 15.2 8 21 3 1 1 1 389 81.0 32.6 52 8

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – – – – – – – – – – – –– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 10 51 11.8 11 14 4 – 1 3 240 62.1 25.0 18 3

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 39 495 12.3 63 142 34 22 2 10 1 567 63.6 23.3 177 27

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 39 494 12.3 63 142 34 22 2 10 1 566 63.5 23.2 177 27

East End subdistrict – ------------------ 6 16.724 –––– 36 88.9 36.1 10 3

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 1 013 11 742 17.0 2 597 3 514 500 221 57 222 27 122 60.6 16.4 2 410 354

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 426 5 173 13.5 1 122 1 490 208 93 26 89 11 340 53.1 10.3 790 119

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 234 3 122 11.9 561 874 124 62 14 48 7 001 49.6 9.4 469 77

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 71 828 12.2 152 220 29 12 8 9 1 391 54.9 6.2 67 7

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 121 1 223 18.5 409 396 55 19 4 32 2 948 60.4 14.3 254 35

East End subdistrict ------------------ 107 1 357 22.2 318 417 57 32 9 16 3 529 61.4 20.4 334 50

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 125 1 020 39.3 362 334 28 20 – 8 4 462 81.7 32.9 630 105

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 102 1 162 17.5 220 355 69 29 5 35 2 500 59.4 18.2 205 32

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 224 2 711 11.0 446 823 128 44 15 69 4 369 53.0 7.3 275 23

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 224 2 711 11.0 446 823 128 44 15 69 4 369 53.0 7.3 275 23

Water Island subdistrict – --------------- 11 81.83521 – 1 145 97.2 46.2 42 12

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – – – – – – – – – – – –– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 29 308 26.6 126 90 8 2 2 4 777 86.9 31.4 134 13

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 3
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 4

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 4. Education and Veteran Status: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Persons 3 years and over enrolled in school

Elementary or high

school

Persons 16 to 19 years

Not enrolled in school and not high school graduate

Persons 25 years and over Civilian veterans 16

years and over

Preprimary

school Total

Percent in

private

school College Total Total Employed

UnemployedNot in

labor force Total

Percent

high school

graduate

or higher

Percent

with bachelor’s

degree or

higher Total

65 years

and over

Virgin Islands ---------------- 1 919 26 062 18.7 4 677 7 581 1 269 453 186 628 55 639 56.5 15.1 4 879 738

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 842 13 643 20.5 1 996 3 886 728 209 125 392 26 285 51.4 13.0 2 212 343

St. John Island ----------------------- 64 677 12.9 84 181 41 23 4 14 2 232 66.8 25.3 257 41

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 1 013 11 742 17.0 2 597 3 514 500 221 57 222 27 122 60.6 16.4 2 410 354

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 54 899 40.4 183 261 36 10 4 22 2 148 64.3 19.9 202 37

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 224 2 711 11.0 446 823 128 44 15 69 4 369 53.0 7.3 275 23

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 15 125 15.2 8 21 3 1 1 1 389 81.0 32.6 52 8

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 234 3 122 11.9 561 874 124 62 14 48 7 001 49.6 9.4 469 77

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 426 5 173 13.5 1 122 1 490 208 93 26 89 11 340 53.1 10.3 790 119

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 71 828 12.2 152 220 29 12 8 9 1 391 54.9 6.2 67 7

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 121 1 223 18.5 409 396 55 19 4 32 2 948 60.4 14.3 254 35

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 53 632 20.1 74 148 29 5 4 20 1 433 40.5 5.7 115 23

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 64 781 20.9 107 188 35 6 4 25 1 826 45.9 8.3 148 29

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 10 51 11.8 11 14 4 – 1 3 240 62.1 25.0 18 3

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 39 494 12.3 63 142 34 22 2 10 1 566 63.5 23.2 177 27

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 39 495 12.3 63 142 34 22 2 10 1 567 63.6 23.3 177 27

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 29 268 57.8 75 77 2 2 – – 1 265 85.7 34.5 232 53

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- – 6 16.724 –––– 36 88.9 36.1 10 3

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 107 1 357 22.2 318 417 57 32 9 16 3 529 61.4 20.4 334 50

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 19 253 8.7 35 60 12 2 2 8 614 41.0 13.2 44 1

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 83 1 226 9.7 153 335 62 13 9 38 1 906 41.3 9.7 137 22

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 64 973 10.0 118 275 50 11 7 30 1 292 41.4 8.0 93 21

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 32 894 9.3 102 239 41 7 9 25 1 152 33.2 6.1 54 7

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 71 1 470 16.2 195 455 90 19 22 49 2 819 48.0 8.8 218 33

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 125 1 020 39.3 362 334 28 20 – 8 4 462 81.7 32.9 630 105

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 78 1 377 15.0 204 362 56 12 12 32 2 438 45.7 12.8 198 27

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 214 3 003 27.1 550 921 172 59 26 87 6 490 59.6 16.4 648 91

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 118 2 237 14.9 256 589 136 44 21 71 3 496 39.0 7.0 150 11

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 102 1 162 17.5 220 355 69 29 5 35 2 500 59.4 18.2 205 32

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 131 2 382 16.9 273 698 139 44 27 68 3 897 44.3 8.9 279 40

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 224 2 711 11.0 446 823 128 44 15 69 4 369 53.0 7.3 275 23

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - – 11 81.83521 – 1 145 97.2 46.2 42 12

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 29 308 26.6 126 90 8 2 2 4 777 86.9 31.4 134 13

4 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 5

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 5. Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Persons 16 years and over

Labor force

Percent in labor

force Civilian labor force Workers

Means of transportation to work

Worked in 1989

Worked 40 or more

weeks in 1989

Females with own children under 6

years

Total Female Total Female Total

Percent

unemployed Total

Percent

using

car,

truck, or

van

Percent

in carpools

Percent

using

public

transportation Total Total

Usually

worked

35 or

more

hours

per

week,

50 to 52

weeks Total

Percent

in labor

force

Own children under

6 years in

families

and subfamilies, all

parents in

household

in labor

force

Virgin Islands ---------------- 70 323 36 961 67.6 61.4 47 443 6.7 41 769 73.7 22.9 11.7 47 630 36 770 29 078 6 508 66.3 6 720

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 33 556 17 498 62.6 54.0 20 950 9.2 17 856 77.4 18.9 11.7 20 738 15 089 11 439 3 290 56.2 2 997

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 2 631 1 295 68.8 63.0 1 809 5.3 1 618 90.1 20.3 3.6 1 815 1 454 1 098 201 68.7 223

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 8 3 50.0 33.3 4 – 4 100.0 50.0 – 4 3 3 1 100.0 1

Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 2 221 1 165 63.0 55.1 1 397 12.4 1 146 63.8 21.0 12.7 1 360 1 000 790 201 57.7 199

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 1 743 907 61.4 52.8 1 070 13.2 870 59.5 20.1 14.0 1 034 752 600 169 54.4 165

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 421 674 67.5 58.6 954 4.4 879 86.5 15.7 .7 1 033 796 626 80 66.3 71

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 2 554 1 427 54.2 46.5 1 377 8.8 1 209 52.5 12.2 26.7 1 339 914 714 287 46.7 228

Frederiksted town ----------------- 758 383 69.4 60.8 525 8.8 449 47.9 14.5 28.7 499 369 297 57 63.2 58

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 1 796 1 044 47.8 41.3 852 8.8 760 55.3 10.9 25.5 840 545 417 230 42.6 170

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 3 642 1 876 63.3 53.6 2 301 9.7 1 896 82.2 19.1 7.2 2 281 1 620 1 267 350 59.4 341

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 3 135 1 680 63.5 54.9 1 985 10.6 1 663 70.8 18.9 21.4 1 992 1 372 928 356 58.1 324

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 1 589 934 59.0 53.2 935 13.9 752 65.0 19.5 30.7 918 563 303 215 58.6 189

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 8 201 4 255 66.1 58.3 5 411 7.8 4 628 80.2 19.0 8.5 5 443 4 011 3 045 777 60.1 746

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – ––– – – – – – – – – – – – –

Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 4 621 2 362 58.5 48.9 2 700 13.1 2 243 75.3 18.9 14.3 2 520 1 692 1 228 553 50.5 449

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 5 130 2 764 58.9 49.2 3 016 9.6 2 574 81.5 20.7 13.3 2 955 2 230 1 743 485 50.7 416

St. John Island ----------------------- 2 627 1 322 78.0 74.3 2 048 2.8 1 855 63.4 18.7 8.8 2 142 1 651 1 168 219 79.0 257

Central subdistrict ------------------- 438 227 80.1 77.5 351 2.3 333 65.2 18.6 10.8 375 291 197 44 72.7 45

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – ––– – – – – – – – – – – – –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 273 143 71.4 67.8 195 8.7 163 77.9 31.9 2.5 209 150 102 26 61.5 34

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 1 874 930 78.8 75.1 1 477 2.2 1 336 60.9 16.9 9.3 1 528 1 191 864 147 85.0 178

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 1 873 929 78.8 75.0 1 476 2.2 1 335 60.9 16.9 9.3 1 527 1 190 863 146 84.9 177

East End subdistrict ------------------ 42 22 59.5 50.0 25 4.0 23 78.3 30.4 – 30 19 5 2 – –

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 34 140 18 141 71.8 67.7 24 445 4.9 22 058 71.5 26.5 12.0 24 750 20 030 16 471 2 999 76.4 3 466

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 14 423 7 864 68.3 63.8 9 836 5.6 8 754 58.2 21.9 17.7 9 835 7 915 6 540 1 375 76.9 1 598

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 8 732 4 709 68.2 64.5 5 948 5.2 5 301 54.1 21.2 16.0 5 930 4 797 3 964 796 78.6 936

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 1 811 1 017 69.3 65.2 1 255 8.5 1 048 59.0 20.9 21.6 1 226 963 805 219 74.4 261

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 3 880 2 138 68.1 61.6 2 633 4.9 2 405 67.1 23.9 19.7 2 679 2 155 1 771 360 74.4 401

East End subdistrict ------------------ 4 342 2 161 76.6 73.0 3 322 4.4 3 011 75.8 27.6 8.8 3 347 2 654 2 132 330 81.5 417

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 5 124 2 507 78.5 73.5 4 007 2.1 3 746 90.9 29.6 1.6 4 122 3 453 2 772 328 73.2 328

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 3 221 1 695 73.1 67.6 2 344 4.9 2 108 72.2 27.3 12.5 2 372 1 879 1 471 298 71.5 327

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 5 910 3 350 69.5 68.3 4 094 6.7 3 665 77.2 31.5 13.0 4 190 3 391 2 954 586 75.3 708

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 5 910 3 350 69.5 68.3 4 094 6.7 3 665 77.2 31.5 13.0 4 190 3 391 2 954 586 75.3 708

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 158 66 67.1 59.1 106 1.9 102 26.5 13.7 9.8 114 83 53 3 33.3 1

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – ––– – – – – – – – – – – – –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 962 498 76.8 76.1 736 2.2 672 91.8 35.6 2.7 770 655 549 79 88.6 87

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 5
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 6

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 6. Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Persons 16 years and over

Labor force

Percent in labor

force Civilian labor force Workers

Means of transportation to work

Worked in 1989

Worked 40 or more

weeks in 1989

Females with own children under 6

years

Total Female Total Female Total

Percent

unemployed Total

Percent

using

car,

truck, or

van

Percent

in carpools

Percent

using

public

transportation Total Total

Usually

worked

35 or

more

hours

per

week,

50 to 52

weeks Total

Percent

in labor

force

Own children under

6 years in

families

and subfamilies, all

parents in

household

in labor

force

Virgin Islands ---------------- 70 323 36 961 67.6 61.4 47 443 6.7 41 769 73.7 22.9 11.7 47 630 36 770 29 078 6 508 66.3 6 720

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 33 556 17 498 62.6 54.0 20 950 9.2 17 856 77.4 18.9 11.7 20 738 15 089 11 439 3 290 56.2 2 997

St. John Island ----------------------- 2 627 1 322 78.0 74.3 2 048 2.8 1 855 63.4 18.7 8.8 2 142 1 651 1 168 219 79.0 257

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 34 140 18 141 71.8 67.7 24 445 4.9 22 058 71.5 26.5 12.0 24 750 20 030 16 471 2 999 76.4 3 466

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 2 631 1 295 68.8 63.0 1 809 5.3 1 618 90.1 20.3 3.6 1 815 1 454 1 098 201 68.7 223

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 5 910 3 350 69.5 68.3 4 094 6.7 3 665 77.2 31.5 13.0 4 190 3 391 2 954 586 75.3 708

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 438 227 80.1 77.5 351 2.3 333 65.2 18.6 10.8 375 291 197 44 72.7 45

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 8 732 4 709 68.2 64.5 5 948 5.2 5 301 54.1 21.2 16.0 5 930 4 797 3 964 796 78.6 936

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 14 423 7 864 68.3 63.8 9 836 5.6 8 754 58.2 21.9 17.7 9 835 7 915 6 540 1 375 76.9 1 598

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 1 811 1 017 69.3 65.2 1 255 8.5 1 048 59.0 20.9 21.6 1 226 963 805 219 74.4 261

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 3 880 2 138 68.1 61.6 2 633 4.9 2 405 67.1 23.9 19.7 2 679 2 155 1 771 360 74.4 401

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 1 751 910 61.4 52.7 1 074 13.1 874 59.7 20.3 14.0 1 038 755 603 170 54.7 166

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 2 221 1 165 63.0 55.1 1 397 12.4 1 146 63.8 21.0 12.7 1 360 1 000 790 201 57.7 199

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 273 143 71.4 67.8 195 8.7 163 77.9 31.9 2.5 209 150 102 26 61.5 34

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 1 873 929 78.8 75.0 1 476 2.2 1 335 60.9 16.9 9.3 1 527 1 190 863 146 84.9 177

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 1 874 930 78.8 75.1 1 477 2.2 1 336 60.9 16.9 9.3 1 528 1 191 864 147 85.0 178

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 1 421 674 67.5 58.6 954 4.4 879 86.5 15.7 .7 1 033 796 626 80 66.3 71

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 42 22 59.5 50.0 25 4.0 23 78.3 30.4 – 30 19 5 2 – – East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 4 342 2 161 76.6 73.0 3 322 4.4 3 011 75.8 27.6 8.8 3 347 2 654 2 132 330 81.5 417

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 758 383 69.4 60.8 525 8.8 449 47.9 14.5 28.7 499 369 297 57 63.2 58

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 2 554 1 427 54.2 46.5 1 377 8.8 1 209 52.5 12.2 26.7 1 339 914 714 287 46.7 228

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 1 796 1 044 47.8 41.3 852 8.8 760 55.3 10.9 25.5 840 545 417 230 42.6 170

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 1 589 934 59.0 53.2 935 13.9 752 65.0 19.5 30.7 918 563 303 215 58.6 189

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 3 642 1 876 63.3 53.6 2 301 9.7 1 896 82.2 19.1 7.2 2 281 1 620 1 267 350 59.4 341

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 5 124 2 507 78.5 73.5 4 007 2.1 3 746 90.9 29.6 1.6 4 122 3 453 2 772 328 73.2 328

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 3 135 1 680 63.5 54.9 1 985 10.6 1 663 70.8 18.9 21.4 1 992 1 372 928 356 58.1 324

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 8 201 4 255 66.1 58.3 5 411 7.8 4 628 80.2 19.0 8.5 5 443 4 011 3 045 777 60.1 746

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 4 621 2 362 58.5 48.9 2 700 13.1 2 243 75.3 18.9 14.3 2 520 1 692 1 228 553 50.5 449

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 3 221 1 695 73.1 67.6 2 344 4.9 2 108 72.2 27.3 12.5 2 372 1 879 1 471 298 71.5 327

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 5 130 2 764 58.9 49.2 3 016 9.6 2 574 81.5 20.7 13.3 2 955 2 230 1 743 485 50.7 416

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 5 910 3 350 69.5 68.3 4 094 6.7 3 665 77.2 31.5 13.0 4 190 3 391 2 954 586 75.3 708

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 158 66 67.1 59.1 106 1.9 102 26.5 13.7 9.8 114 83 53 3 33.3 1

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 962 498 76.8 76.1 736 2.2 672 91.8 35.6 2.7 770 655 549 79 88.6 87

6 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 7

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 7. Disability Status: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 16 to 64 years

Percent with a work

disability

Percent with a mobility or self-care

limitation

Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 65 years and over

Percent with a mobility or self-care

limitation

Percent in labor force of civilian noninstitutionalized persons 16 to 64 years withm

Total Total

Prevented

from

working Total

Mobility

limitation

Self-care

limitation Total Total

Mobility

limitation

Self-care

limitation

A work

disability

No work

disability

A mobility

limitation

No mobility

limitation

Virgin Islands ---------------- 63 413 5.2 2.8 2.3 1.5 1.8 6 349 14.5 12.8 9.9 36.1 75.0 25.1 73.7

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 30 221 5.7 3.4 3.0 1.8 2.4 2 986 15.1 12.4 10.8 32.0 70.0 24.1 68.6

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 2 328 3.7 1.9 1.8 1.2 1.2 248 10.9 10.9 7.7 36.8 77.2 10.3 76.5

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 5 –– – – – 3 –––– 80.0 – 80.0

Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 1 943 5.7 3.7 2.7 1.6 2.0 275 20.7 19.3 11.6 30.9 72.0 21.9 70.4

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 1 529 6.0 3.8 2.9 1.7 2.0 213 21.6 20.2 12.2 31.5 70.4 19.2 68.9

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 246 3.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.9 170 15.9 11.8 10.0 22.4 75.9 25.0 74.6

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 2 280 7.9 4.2 1.5 1.4 1.0 267 8.2 7.9 6.7 29.1 61.2 12.9 59.3

Frederiksted town ----------------- 684 5.6 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.0 73 17.8 16.4 13.7 50.0 76.2 10.0 75.7

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 1 596 8.8 5.0 1.4 1.3 1.0 194 4.6 4.6 4.1 23.4 54.6 14.3 52.3

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 3 335 5.9 3.7 4.9 3.4 4.3 297 18.2 17.2 12.8 32.5 70.2 51.3 68.6

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 2 871 5.2 3.0 2.1 1.5 1.7 258 13.2 12.8 8.1 34.7 69.7 18.6 68.6

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 1 464 5.4 3.6 2.0 1.7 1.7 122 14.8 14.8 10.7 29.1 65.3 12.0 64.2

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 7 453 6.1 3.3 3.0 1.2 2.5 723 12.9 10.4 8.2 37.4 73.0 12.0 71.6

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – –– – – – – – – – – –– – Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 4 110 5.5 3.6 3.6 2.2 2.7 290 8.3 7.9 5.5 31.6 66.7 20.0 65.8

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 4 655 5.5 3.9 2.9 1.9 2.4 458 24.9 14.8 22.1 23.6 66.2 18.0 64.7

St. John Island ----------------------- 2 414 4.6 1.6 1.0 .9 .7 213 9.4 9.4 6.1 58.0 84.1 23.8 83.4

Central subdistrict ------------------- 414 3.6 .5 .7 .5 .5 24 4.2 4.2 – 73.3 84.7 – 84.7

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – –– – – – – – – – – –– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 234 7.7 3.0 1.7 1.7 1.3 39 10.3 10.3 7.7 55.6 78.2 25.0 77.4

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 1 731 4.5 1.7 1.0 .8 .6 143 9.8 9.8 7.0 56.4 84.9 21.4 84.2

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 1 730 4.5 1.7 1.0 .8 .6 143 9.8 9.8 7.0 56.4 84.9 21.4 84.1

East End subdistrict ------------------ 35 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 7 14.3 14.3 – – 73.5 100.0 70.6

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 30 778 4.7 2.4 1.8 1.3 1.3 3 150 14.3 13.4 9.4 39.2 79.2 26.5 78.0

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 12 602 5.0 2.6 1.6 1.3 1.1 1 675 14.6 13.6 9.8 40.0 77.3 27.4 76.1

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 7 439 4.9 2.5 1.7 1.4 1.2 1 157 13.8 12.9 9.8 41.7 78.7 28.2 77.5

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 1 627 6.7 3.4 1.7 1.6 1.2 184 25.5 23.9 15.8 34.9 78.5 19.2 76.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 3 536 4.4 2.4 1.4 1.1 .8 334 11.1 10.5 6.6 39.6 74.0 30.8 73.0

East End subdistrict ------------------ 4 004 4.3 1.8 2.0 1.6 1.3 335 16.7 16.1 9.0 52.0 82.5 33.8 82.0

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 4 696 3.8 1.5 2.0 .8 1.7 390 10.5 9.5 8.2 45.6 84.5 38.9 83.4

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 3 017 4.2 2.1 1.8 1.1 1.2 194 14.4 13.4 9.8 38.6 77.9 35.3 76.7

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 5 430 5.7 3.3 2.3 1.5 1.7 468 15.8 15.2 10.3 28.2 76.5 13.1 74.7

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 5 430 5.7 3.3 2.3 1.5 1.7 468 15.8 15.2 10.3 28.2 76.5 13.1 74.7

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 129 .8 .8 .8 .8 – 29 6.9 6.9 3.4 – 81.3 – 81.3

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – –– – – – – – – – – –– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 900 2.9 1.8 1.1 .9 .6 59 6.8 5.1 3.4 26.9 82.4 – 81.5

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 7
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 8

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 8. Disability Status: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 16 to 64 years

Percent with a work

disability

Percent with a mobility or self-care

limitation

Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 65 years and over

Percent with a mobility or self-care

limitation

Percent in labor force of civilian noninstitutionalized persons 16 to 64 years withm

Total Total

Prevented

from

working Total

Mobility

limitation

Self-care

limitation Total Total

Mobility

limitation

Self-care

limitation

A work

disability

No work

disability

A mobility

limitation

No mobility

limitation

Virgin Islands ---------------- 63 413 5.2 2.8 2.3 1.5 1.8 6 349 14.5 12.8 9.9 36.1 75.0 25.1 73.7

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 30 221 5.7 3.4 3.0 1.8 2.4 2 986 15.1 12.4 10.8 32.0 70.0 24.1 68.6

St. John Island ----------------------- 2 414 4.6 1.6 1.0 .9 .7 213 9.4 9.4 6.1 58.0 84.1 23.8 83.4

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 30 778 4.7 2.4 1.8 1.3 1.3 3 150 14.3 13.4 9.4 39.2 79.2 26.5 78.0

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 2 328 3.7 1.9 1.8 1.2 1.2 248 10.9 10.9 7.7 36.8 77.2 10.3 76.5

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 5 430 5.7 3.3 2.3 1.5 1.7 468 15.8 15.2 10.3 28.2 76.5 13.1 74.7

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 414 3.6 .5 .7 .5 .5 24 4.2 4.2 – 73.3 84.7 – 84.7

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 7 439 4.9 2.5 1.7 1.4 1.2 1 157 13.8 12.9 9.8 41.7 78.7 28.2 77.5

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 12 602 5.0 2.6 1.6 1.3 1.1 1 675 14.6 13.6 9.8 40.0 77.3 27.4 76.1

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 1 627 6.7 3.4 1.7 1.6 1.2 184 25.5 23.9 15.8 34.9 78.5 19.2 76.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 3 536 4.4 2.4 1.4 1.1 .8 334 11.1 10.5 6.6 39.6 74.0 30.8 73.0

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 1 534 6.0 3.8 2.9 1.7 2.0 216 21.3 19.9 12.0 31.5 70.4 19.2 68.9

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 1 943 5.7 3.7 2.7 1.6 2.0 275 20.7 19.3 11.6 30.9 72.0 21.9 70.4

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 234 7.7 3.0 1.7 1.7 1.3 39 10.3 10.3 7.7 55.6 78.2 25.0 77.4

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 1 730 4.5 1.7 1.0 .8 .6 143 9.8 9.8 7.0 56.4 84.9 21.4 84.1

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 1 731 4.5 1.7 1.0 .8 .6 143 9.8 9.8 7.0 56.4 84.9 21.4 84.2

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 1 246 3.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.9 170 15.9 11.8 10.0 22.4 75.9 25.0 74.6

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 35 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 7 14.3 14.3 – – 73.5 100.0 70.6

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 4 004 4.3 1.8 2.0 1.6 1.3 335 16.7 16.1 9.0 52.0 82.5 33.8 82.0

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 684 5.6 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.0 73 17.8 16.4 13.7 50.0 76.2 10.0 75.7

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 2 280 7.9 4.2 1.5 1.4 1.0 267 8.2 7.9 6.7 29.1 61.2 12.9 59.3

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 1 596 8.8 5.0 1.4 1.3 1.0 194 4.6 4.6 4.1 23.4 54.6 14.3 52.3

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 1 464 5.4 3.6 2.0 1.7 1.7 122 14.8 14.8 10.7 29.1 65.3 12.0 64.2

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 3 335 5.9 3.7 4.9 3.4 4.3 297 18.2 17.2 12.8 32.5 70.2 51.3 68.6

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 4 696 3.8 1.5 2.0 .8 1.7 390 10.5 9.5 8.2 45.6 84.5 38.9 83.4

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 2 871 5.2 3.0 2.1 1.5 1.7 258 13.2 12.8 8.1 34.7 69.7 18.6 68.6

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 7 453 6.1 3.3 3.0 1.2 2.5 723 12.9 10.4 8.2 37.4 73.0 12.0 71.6

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 4 110 5.5 3.6 3.6 2.2 2.7 290 8.3 7.9 5.5 31.6 66.7 20.0 65.8

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 3 017 4.2 2.1 1.8 1.1 1.2 194 14.4 13.4 9.8 38.6 77.9 35.3 76.7

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 4 655 5.5 3.9 2.9 1.9 2.4 458 24.9 14.8 22.1 23.6 66.2 18.0 64.7

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 5 430 5.7 3.3 2.3 1.5 1.7 468 15.8 15.2 10.3 28.2 76.5 13.1 74.7

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 129 .8 .8 .8 .8 – 29 6.9 6.9 3.4 – 81.3 – 81.3

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 900 2.9 1.8 1.1 .9 .6 59 6.8 5.1 3.4 26.9 82.4 – 81.5

8 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 9

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 9. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Median income in 1989 (dollars) Persons for whom poverty status is determined

Income in 1989 below poverty level

All ages Related children

Under 18 years 5 to 17 years

Persons 65 years and

over

Families with income in 1989 below poverty

level

Per capita

income in 1989

(dollars)

House- holds Families

Nonfamily

house- holds Total Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent NumberPercent of

all families

Virgin Islands ---------------- 9 440 22 050 24 036 15 262 100 689 27 334 27.1 12 722 36.6 9 264 36.0 1 956 30.8 5 349 23.2

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 8 058 19 340 20 835 12 493 49 581 16 686 33.7 7 917 43.1 5 832 42.6 1 066 35.7 3 308 29.5

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 11 152 28 415 31 682 20 850 3 604 507 14.1 189 16.2 151 16.8 50 20.2 103 12.1

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 10 925 11 250 43 750 3 750 9 1 11.1 –––– 1 33.3 – –

Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 7 607 14 937 16 481 11 017 3 177 1 215 38.2 490 46.6 345 45.9 118 42.9 247 35.7

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 6 530 13 359 15 610 10 068 2 527 1 029 40.7 414 48.3 285 47.1 97 45.5 207 38.3

East End subdistrict ------------------ 18 962 34 217 40 097 22 443 1 734 223 12.9 50 14.1 37 13.8 24 14.1 45 9.6

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 5 387 11 806 12 172 9 756 3 990 2 021 50.7 1 015 63.2 755 63.4 109 40.8 397 46.8

Frederiksted town ----------------- 7 770 13 988 17 578 11 111 1 049 376 35.8 150 46.9 116 47.5 26 35.6 67 31.8

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 4 543 11 009 11 250 8 333 2 941 1 645 55.9 865 67.3 639 67.5 83 42.8 330 51.8

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 6 967 19 460 21 170 11 506 5 461 1 659 30.4 763 36.9 584 37.6 110 37.0 310 25.6

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 7 549 17 380 18 346 11 667 4 814 1 840 38.2 903 48.4 667 48.9 104 40.3 366 33.8

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 4 926 12 634 13 112 6 736 2 646 1 295 48.9 676 57.3 503 56.8 69 56.6 267 45.0

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 9 767 23 919 25 970 15 781 11 843 3 022 25.5 1 420 34.3 1 010 33.2 211 29.2 608 22.3

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – – – – – – – – – – – ––– –

Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 5 706 14 841 15 992 8 684 7 169 3 273 45.7 1 713 55.8 1 243 54.5 145 50.0 639 41.0

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 6 479 17 080 18 539 10 653 7 789 2 926 37.6 1 374 45.2 1 040 44.1 195 42.6 593 33.6

St. John Island ----------------------- 13 443 26 295 31 277 19 812 3 487 523 15.0 196 20.9 132 19.9 46 21.6 89 11.6

Central subdistrict ------------------- 14 645 26 250 27 500 23 750 618 120 19.4 59 30.9 37 27.0 5 20.8 26 17.8

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – – – – – – – – – – – ––– – Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 10 794 18 611 22 250 14 688 358 84 23.5 28 31.8 16 32.0 6 15.4 15 19.5

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 13 606 27 076 33 320 20 179 2 460 309 12.6 107 16.5 79 16.8 34 23.8 46 8.6

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 13 610 27 055 33 347 20 179 2 457 309 12.6 107 16.6 79 16.9 34 23.8 46 8.6

East End subdistrict ------------------ 9 742 22 917 20 000 23 750 51 10 19.6 2 18.2 – – 1 14.3 2 20.0

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 10 587 24 619 26 661 16 902 47 621 10 125 21.3 4 609 29.7 3 300 29.0 844 26.8 1 952 17.7

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 8 063 19 282 21 443 12 596 20 154 5 170 25.7 2 297 33.9 1 615 32.9 530 31.6 1 031 22.2

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 7 942 18 337 20 790 12 146 12 139 3 255 26.8 1 434 36.1 1 033 35.4 374 32.3 653 23.6

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 6 639 18 045 19 896 12 260 2 831 810 28.6 418 37.1 298 36.5 58 31.5 166 25.7

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 9 081 21 926 24 052 14 872 5 184 1 105 21.3 445 26.5 284 24.2 98 29.3 212 17.2

East End subdistrict ------------------ 12 333 29 116 31 498 18 333 5 908 901 15.3 353 20.0 257 19.6 66 19.7 165 11.8

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 18 881 39 348 44 680 28 828 6 370 569 8.9 136 9.5 97 9.3 73 18.7 88 5.6

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 12 928 25 050 26 505 18 636 4 645 1 197 25.8 589 37.0 421 36.6 50 25.8 233 22.4

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 7 256 23 466 24 472 13 558 9 054 2 191 24.2 1 198 33.9 880 33.4 114 24.4 416 20.6

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 7 256 23 466 24 472 13 558 9 054 2 191 24.2 1 198 33.9 880 33.4 114 24.4 416 20.6

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 22 735 38 738 40 470 34 271 170 10 5.9 17.1 19.1 – – 1 2.0

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – – – – – – – – – – – ––– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 14 953 40 249 44 443 25 455 1 320 87 6.6 35 8.6 29 9.2 11 18.6 18 5.4

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 9
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 10

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 10. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Median income in 1989 (dollars) Persons for whom poverty status is determined

Income in 1989 below poverty level

All ages Related children

Under 18 years 5 to 17 years

Persons 65 years and

over

Families with income in 1989 below poverty

level

Per capita

income in 1989

(dollars)

House- holds Families

Nonfamily

house- holds Total Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent NumberPercent of

all families

Virgin Islands ---------------- 9 440 22 050 24 036 15 262 100 689 27 334 27.1 12 722 36.6 9 264 36.0 1 956 30.8 5 349 23.2

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 8 058 19 340 20 835 12 493 49 581 16 686 33.7 7 917 43.1 5 832 42.6 1 066 35.7 3 308 29.5

St. John Island ----------------------- 13 443 26 295 31 277 19 812 3 487 523 15.0 196 20.9 132 19.9 46 21.6 89 11.6

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 10 587 24 619 26 661 16 902 47 621 10 125 21.3 4 609 29.7 3 300 29.0 844 26.8 1 952 17.7

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 11 152 28 415 31 682 20 850 3 604 507 14.1 189 16.2 151 16.8 50 20.2 103 12.1

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 7 256 23 466 24 472 13 558 9 054 2 191 24.2 1 198 33.9 880 33.4 114 24.4 416 20.6

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 14 645 26 250 27 500 23 750 618 120 19.4 59 30.9 37 27.0 5 20.8 26 17.8

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 7 942 18 337 20 790 12 146 12 139 3 255 26.8 1 434 36.1 1 033 35.4 374 32.3 653 23.6

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 8 063 19 282 21 443 12 596 20 154 5 170 25.7 2 297 33.9 1 615 32.9 530 31.6 1 031 22.2

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 6 639 18 045 19 896 12 260 2 831 810 28.6 418 37.1 298 36.5 58 31.5 166 25.7

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 9 081 21 926 24 052 14 872 5 184 1 105 21.3 445 26.5 284 24.2 98 29.3 212 17.2

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 6 545 13 333 15 610 10 034 2 536 1 030 40.6 414 48.2 285 47.1 98 45.4 207 38.1

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 7 607 14 937 16 481 11 017 3 177 1 215 38.2 490 46.6 345 45.9 118 42.9 247 35.7

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 10 794 18 611 22 250 14 688 358 84 23.5 28 31.8 16 32.0 6 15.4 15 19.5

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 13 610 27 055 33 347 20 179 2 457 309 12.6 107 16.6 79 16.9 34 23.8 46 8.6

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 13 606 27 076 33 320 20 179 2 460 309 12.6 107 16.5 79 16.8 34 23.8 46 8.6

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 18 962 34 217 40 097 22 443 1 734 223 12.9 50 14.1 37 13.8 24 14.1 45 9.6

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 9 742 22 917 20 000 23 750 51 10 19.6 2 18.2 – – 1 14.3 2 20.0

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 12 333 29 116 31 498 18 333 5 908 901 15.3 353 20.0 257 19.6 66 19.7 165 11.8

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 7 770 13 988 17 578 11 111 1 049 376 35.8 150 46.9 116 47.5 26 35.6 67 31.8

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 5 387 11 806 12 172 9 756 3 990 2 021 50.7 1 015 63.2 755 63.4 109 40.8 397 46.8

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 4 543 11 009 11 250 8 333 2 941 1 645 55.9 865 67.3 639 67.5 83 42.8 330 51.8

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 4 926 12 634 13 112 6 736 2 646 1 295 48.9 676 57.3 503 56.8 69 56.6 267 45.0

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 6 967 19 460 21 170 11 506 5 461 1 659 30.4 763 36.9 584 37.6 110 37.0 310 25.6

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 18 881 39 348 44 680 28 828 6 370 569 8.9 136 9.5 97 9.3 73 18.7 88 5.6

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 7 549 17 380 18 346 11 667 4 814 1 840 38.2 903 48.4 667 48.9 104 40.3 366 33.8

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 9 767 23 919 25 970 15 781 11 843 3 022 25.5 1 420 34.3 1 010 33.2 211 29.2 608 22.3

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 5 706 14 841 15 992 8 684 7 169 3 273 45.7 1 713 55.8 1 243 54.5 145 50.0 639 41.0

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 12 928 25 050 26 505 18 636 4 645 1 197 25.8 589 37.0 421 36.6 50 25.8 233 22.4

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 6 479 17 080 18 539 10 653 7 789 2 926 37.6 1 374 45.2 1 040 44.1 195 42.6 593 33.6

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 7 256 23 466 24 472 13 558 9 054 2 191 24.2 1 198 33.9 880 33.4 114 24.4 416 20.6

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 22 735 38 738 40 470 34 271 170 10 5.9 17.1 19.1 – – 1 2.0

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 14 953 40 249 44 443 25 455 1 320 87 6.6 35 8.6 29 9.2 11 18.6 18 5.4

10 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 11

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 11. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Percent

Year structure built Bedrooms

All housing units

1980 to March

1990 1939 or earlier None or 1 4 or more Condominium

Lacking complete plumbing facilitiesWith public

water system

only

With public

sewer

Lacking complete

kitchen facilities

Virgin Islands ---------------- 39 290 26.8 5.9 26.1 10.5 7.7 6.0 20.7 50.2 6.0

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 18 937 26.3 5.2 21.5 10.8 7.0 6.4 25.1 46.6 6.0

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 1 378 18.7 4.2 17.9 12.0 7.1 2.0 3.6 32.2 2.8

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 3 – – 33.3 33.3 – – 33.3 66.7 – Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 1 378 14.9 15.5 29.8 7.1 7.0 4.2 44.3 93.5 4.9

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 1 032 9.9 19.2 34.7 7.2 – 3.9 48.4 95.5 6.2

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 143 43.5 2.4 19.2 14.1 15.7 1.4 .9 15.0 3.1

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 1 493 22.4 23.0 34.6 8.6 – 8.4 61.0 77.4 9.3

Frederiksted town ----------------- 501 4.0 55.1 46.3 7.8 – 16.2 57.5 91.6 20.0

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 992 31.7 6.8 28.6 9.0 – 4.4 62.8 70.2 3.9

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 2 242 29.6 3.1 15.6 9.1 4.0 10.3 23.9 43.3 10.6

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 1 724 22.8 3.9 20.4 8.9 1.9 11.6 14.1 37.4 10.2

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 811 13.9 1.0 14.2 9.5 .2 5.8 12.3 65.6 6.2

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 4 759 21.8 1.6 23.6 12.7 13.6 5.1 24.1 51.0 3.5

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – –––––––– – Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 2 344 43.2 4.8 17.6 10.6 3.4 8.4 30.4 36.9 6.9

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 2 476 23.7 .8 17.5 11.0 3.8 4.6 21.6 34.2 4.6

St. John Island ----------------------- 1 920 52.1 2.8 42.4 5.4 12.0 10.4 .1 19.5 10.2

Central subdistrict ------------------- 326 60.4 2.5 42.0 3.7 .6 12.0 – 25.8 10.4

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – –––––––– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 199 44.2 9.0 41.2 6.5 – 27.6 – 1.5 29.6

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 1 367 52.0 1.7 42.9 5.6 16.8 7.5 .1 21.1 7.4

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 1 366 52.0 1.7 43.0 5.6 16.8 7.5 .1 21.1 7.4

East End subdistrict ------------------ 28 17.9 17.9 32.1 7.1 – 14.3 – – 7.1

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 18 433 24.5 6.9 29.1 10.8 7.9 5.2 18.4 57.1 5.6

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 7 648 16.5 15.6 34.6 7.0 2.8 6.1 31.6 88.6 7.7

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 4 741 15.0 24.8 37.0 7.1 2.3 6.7 30.1 91.4 9.4

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 951 14.1 – 23.6 9.8 – 8.7 32.7 92.4 5.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 1 956 21.4 1.0 34.1 5.4 5.4 3.4 34.5 80.0 4.6

East End subdistrict ------------------ 2 647 35.6 .5 33.5 10.4 18.1 4.3 .6 15.6 4.8

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 3 149 37.0 1.2 31.8 8.5 15.0 2.6 1.5 11.5 2.7

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 1 759 34.5 .8 23.8 14.3 7.6 13.4 18.8 53.0 10.1

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 2 542 12.6 – 10.7 23.1 6.5 1.8 22.0 76.4 1.7

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 2 542 12.6 – 10.7 23.1 6.5 1.8 22.0 76.4 1.7

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 165 24.2 3.0 31.5 6.7 – 1.8 10.9 – .6

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – –––––––– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 523 35.8 – 18.4 11.5 – 1.9 1.0 19.3 1.9

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 11
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 12

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 12. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Percent

Year structure built Bedrooms

All housing units

1980 to March

1990 1939 or earlier None or 1 4 or more Condominium

Lacking complete plumbing facilitiesWith public

water system

only

With public

sewer

Lacking complete

kitchen facilities

Virgin Islands ---------------- 39 290 26.8 5.9 26.1 10.5 7.7 6.0 20.7 50.2 6.0

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 18 937 26.3 5.2 21.5 10.8 7.0 6.4 25.1 46.6 6.0

St. John Island ----------------------- 1 920 52.1 2.8 42.4 5.4 12.0 10.4 .1 19.5 10.2

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 18 433 24.5 6.9 29.1 10.8 7.9 5.2 18.4 57.1 5.6

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 1 378 18.7 4.2 17.9 12.0 7.1 2.0 3.6 32.2 2.8

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 2 542 12.6 – 10.7 23.1 6.5 1.8 22.0 76.4 1.7

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 326 60.4 2.5 42.0 3.7 .6 12.0 – 25.8 10.4

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 4 741 15.0 24.8 37.0 7.1 2.3 6.7 30.1 91.4 9.4

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 7 648 16.5 15.6 34.6 7.0 2.8 6.1 31.6 88.6 7.7

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 951 14.1 – 23.6 9.8 – 8.7 32.7 92.4 5.5

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 1 956 21.4 1.0 34.1 5.4 5.4 3.4 34.5 80.0 4.6

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 1 035 9.9 19.1 34.7 7.2 – 3.9 48.3 95.5 6.2

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 1 378 14.9 15.5 29.8 7.1 7.0 4.2 44.3 93.5 4.9

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 199 44.2 9.0 41.2 6.5 – 27.6 – 1.5 29.6

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 1 366 52.0 1.7 43.0 5.6 16.8 7.5 .1 21.1 7.4

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 1 367 52.0 1.7 42.9 5.6 16.8 7.5 .1 21.1 7.4

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 1 143 43.5 2.4 19.2 14.1 15.7 1.4 .9 15.0 3.1

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 28 17.9 17.9 32.1 7.1 – 14.3 – – 7.1

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 2 647 35.6 .5 33.5 10.4 18.1 4.3 .6 15.6 4.8

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 501 4.0 55.1 46.3 7.8 – 16.2 57.5 91.6 20.0

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 1 493 22.4 23.0 34.6 8.6 – 8.4 61.0 77.4 9.3

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 992 31.7 6.8 28.6 9.0 – 4.4 62.8 70.2 3.9

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 811 13.9 1.0 14.2 9.5 .2 5.8 12.3 65.6 6.2

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 2 242 29.6 3.1 15.6 9.1 4.0 10.3 23.9 43.3 10.6

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 3 149 37.0 1.2 31.8 8.5 15.0 2.6 1.5 11.5 2.7

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 1 724 22.8 3.9 20.4 8.9 1.9 11.6 14.1 37.4 10.2

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 4 759 21.8 1.6 23.6 12.7 13.6 5.1 24.1 51.0 3.5

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 2 344 43.2 4.8 17.6 10.6 3.4 8.4 30.4 36.9 6.9

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 1 759 34.5 .8 23.8 14.3 7.6 13.4 18.8 53.0 10.1

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 2 476 23.7 .8 17.5 11.0 3.8 4.6 21.6 34.2 4.6

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 2 542 12.6 – 10.7 23.1 6.5 1.8 22.0 76.4 1.7

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 165 24.2 3.0 31.5 6.7 – 1.8 10.9 – .6

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 523 35.8 – 18.4 11.5 – 1.9 1.0 19.3 1.9

12 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 13

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 13. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

Percent withm

Cooking fuel Vehicles available

All occupied

housing units Gas Electricity

Fuel oil, kerosene, etc. Other or none

Water purchased from a vendor None 1 2 or more

No telephone in unit

Virgin Islands ---------------- 32 020 65.2 32.9 .3 1.6 32.3 26.8 43.7 29.5 18.5

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 15 045 69.0 29.2 .3 1.5 33.3 26.0 42.8 31.3 22.1

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 1 164 70.4 28.6 .1 .9 50.9 9.7 42.1 48.2 12.2

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 3 100.0 –––– 33.3 66.7 – – Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 1 101 74.4 22.3 .5 2.8 22.7 42.4 41.8 15.8 31.6

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 861 77.7 18.1 .7 3.5 24.3 48.0 39.3 12.8 35.2

East End subdistrict ------------------ 698 56.9 41.8 .1 1.1 51.3 4.3 38.5 57.2 11.7

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 1 256 69.3 28.0 .2 2.5 20.9 48.5 38.0 13.5 35.7

Frederiksted town ----------------- 411 65.5 30.2 – 4.4 10.7 50.1 39.4 10.5 36.0

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 845 71.2 27.0 .2 1.5 25.8 47.7 37.3 15.0 35.5

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 1 560 82.2 15.3 .3 2.2 30.6 21.7 43.8 34.5 20.1

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 1 466 51.2 46.0 .4 2.4 25.3 30.9 42.3 26.8 19.4

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 734 26.4 72.1 .4 1.1 18.1 43.5 41.6 15.0 15.9

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 3 647 60.5 38.5 .2 .9 40.6 20.3 42.6 37.1 20.0

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – –––––––– – Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 1 963 69.8 28.7 .4 1.2 29.7 32.3 43.0 24.6 28.6

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 2 190 84.9 13.5 .2 1.3 28.7 23.8 47.3 28.9 18.8

St. John Island ----------------------- 1 330 78.7 18.1 1.1 2.0 33.8 25.6 50.1 24.4 20.7

Central subdistrict ------------------- 259 69.5 27.0 1.5 1.9 12.4 22.8 49.4 27.8 27.0

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – –––––––– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 134 83.6 11.9 – 4.5 30.6 21.6 47.8 30.6 22.4

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 918 80.5 16.6 1.2 1.7 40.8 27.3 50.5 22.1 18.5

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 917 80.5 16.6 1.2 1.7 40.9 27.4 50.5 22.1 18.5

East End subdistrict ------------------ 19 84.2 15.8 – – 10.5 5.3 52.6 42.1 26.3

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 15 645 60.4 37.7 .3 1.5 31.3 27.7 44.1 28.2 14.9

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 6 771 66.5 30.7 .4 2.4 27.2 42.9 40.9 16.2 19.3

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 4 178 65.6 31.1 .5 2.8 26.3 48.1 38.9 13.1 20.4

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 842 73.4 25.7 – 1.0 39.3 40.4 42.5 17.1 18.4

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 1 751 65.6 31.9 .6 1.9 23.6 32.0 44.8 23.2 17.2

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 936 67.6 30.3 .7 1.3 43.1 16.3 44.9 38.8 14.3

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 2 550 56.3 42.7 .2 .9 38.2 6.6 47.1 46.4 10.4

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 1 461 45.7 53.0 .1 1.2 35.5 24.0 44.4 31.6 15.7

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 2 404 53.0 46.5 .2 .3 24.3 22.1 48.8 29.1 8.7

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 2 404 53.0 46.5 .2 .3 24.3 22.1 48.8 29.1 8.7

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 86 26.7 73.3 – – 15.1 30.2 39.5 30.2 15.1

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – –––––––– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 437 54.2 44.9 – .9 28.1 6.6 47.6 45.8 6.2

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 13
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 14

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 14. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

Percent withm

Cooking fuel Vehicles available

All occupied

housing units Gas Electricity

Fuel oil, kerosene, etc. Other or none

Water purchased from a vendor None 1 2 or more

No telephone in unit

Virgin Islands ---------------- 32 020 65.2 32.9 .3 1.6 32.3 26.8 43.7 29.5 18.5

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 15 045 69.0 29.2 .3 1.5 33.3 26.0 42.8 31.3 22.1

St. John Island ----------------------- 1 330 78.7 18.1 1.1 2.0 33.8 25.6 50.1 24.4 20.7

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 15 645 60.4 37.7 .3 1.5 31.3 27.7 44.1 28.2 14.9

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 1 164 70.4 28.6 .1 .9 50.9 9.7 42.1 48.2 12.2

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 2 404 53.0 46.5 .2 .3 24.3 22.1 48.8 29.1 8.7

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 259 69.5 27.0 1.5 1.9 12.4 22.8 49.4 27.8 27.0

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 4 178 65.6 31.1 .5 2.8 26.3 48.1 38.9 13.1 20.4

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 6 771 66.5 30.7 .4 2.4 27.2 42.9 40.9 16.2 19.3

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 842 73.4 25.7 – 1.0 39.3 40.4 42.5 17.1 18.4

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 1 751 65.6 31.9 .6 1.9 23.6 32.0 44.8 23.2 17.2

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 864 77.8 18.1 .7 3.5 24.2 47.9 39.4 12.7 35.1

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 1 101 74.4 22.3 .5 2.8 22.7 42.4 41.8 15.8 31.6

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 134 83.6 11.9 – 4.5 30.6 21.6 47.8 30.6 22.4

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 917 80.5 16.6 1.2 1.7 40.9 27.4 50.5 22.1 18.5

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 918 80.5 16.6 1.2 1.7 40.8 27.3 50.5 22.1 18.5

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 698 56.9 41.8 .1 1.1 51.3 4.3 38.5 57.2 11.7

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 19 84.2 15.8 – – 10.5 5.3 52.6 42.1 26.3

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 1 936 67.6 30.3 .7 1.3 43.1 16.3 44.9 38.8 14.3

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 411 65.5 30.2 – 4.4 10.7 50.1 39.4 10.5 36.0

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 1 256 69.3 28.0 .2 2.5 20.9 48.5 38.0 13.5 35.7

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 845 71.2 27.0 .2 1.5 25.8 47.7 37.3 15.0 35.5

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 734 26.4 72.1 .4 1.1 18.1 43.5 41.6 15.0 15.9

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 1 560 82.2 15.3 .3 2.2 30.6 21.7 43.8 34.5 20.1

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 2 550 56.3 42.7 .2 .9 38.2 6.6 47.1 46.4 10.4

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 1 466 51.2 46.0 .4 2.4 25.3 30.9 42.3 26.8 19.4

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 3 647 60.5 38.5 .2 .9 40.6 20.3 42.6 37.1 20.0

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 1 963 69.8 28.7 .4 1.2 29.7 32.3 43.0 24.6 28.6

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 1 461 45.7 53.0 .1 1.2 35.5 24.0 44.4 31.6 15.7

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 2 190 84.9 13.5 .2 1.3 28.7 23.8 47.3 28.9 18.8

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 2 404 53.0 46.5 .2 .3 24.3 22.1 48.8 29.1 8.7

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 86 26.7 73.3 – – 15.1 30.2 39.5 30.2 15.1

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 437 54.2 44.9 – .9 28.1 6.6 47.6 45.8 6.2

14 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 15

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 15. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict

Place

All owner-occupied housing units

Percent with householder moved into unitm

Specified owner-occupied housing units

With a mortgage Not mortgaged

All renter-occupied housing units

Percent with householder moved into unitm

Specified renter paying cash rent

Total

1989 to

March

1990 1969 or earlier Total

Median

selected

monthly

owner

costs

(dollars)

Median

selected monthly

owner

costs as

a percentage of

household

income in

1989 Total

Median

selected

monthly

owner

costs

(dollars)

Median

selected monthly

owner

costs as

a percentage of

household

income in

1989 Total

1989 to

March

1990 1969 or earlier

Median gross

rent (dollars)

Median gross rent

as a percentage of

household

income in

1989

Virgin Islands ---------------- 14 272 10.3 23.3 5 512 411 16.8 5 628 100– 10.5 17 748 33.9 3.6 324 21.1

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 7 271 10.8 20.1 2 794 356 16.1 3 545 100– 10.4 7 774 37.8 3.1 240 18.7

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict --------- 800 7.4 18.1 343 396 16.0 343 100– 10.5 364 52.2 1.9 436 19.8

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 2 – 100.0 ––– 2 100 10.0 1 – – 90 22.5

Christiansted subdistrict --------------- 228 12.7 50.9 44 440 19.5 100 100– 11.2 873 31.0 5.2 237 19.2

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- 150 12.7 52.7 27 450 18.0 71 100– 11.0 711 27.3 5.9 224 19.1

East End subdistrict ------------------ 450 21.8 14.9 168 673 22.1 186 138 10.9 248 66.5 2.8 546 22.3

Frederiksted subdistrict --------------- 295 7.8 39.3 79 357 15.0 164 100– 10.3 961 35.4 5.1 197 20.4

Frederiksted town ----------------- 65 6.2 53.8 7 375 17.5 32 100– 10.8 346 38.2 2.3 237 19.6

Frederiksted Southeast CDP ---------- 230 8.3 35.2 72 355 14.8 132 100– 10.3 615 33.8 6.7 175 21.1

Northcentral subdistrict --------------- 957 8.4 20.4 341 289 14.4 523 100– 10.2 603 38.3 7.0 246 18.1

Northwest subdistrict ----------------- 589 13.1 23.3 169 395 16.8 334 100– 10.7 877 26.7 2.3 157 15.6

Grove Place CDP ------------------ 188 10.6 26.6 46 383 16.4 118 100– 10.8 546 14.8 1.8 119 15.0

Sion Farm subdistrict ----------------- 1 960 9.9 18.8 880 353 15.5 804 100– 10.4 1 687 46.9 2.3 331 19.6

Christiansted town (pt.)------------- – – – – – – – – – – – –– – Southcentral subdistrict --------------- 740 13.5 17.7 242 358 18.4 451 100– 10.4 1 223 38.1 1.4 176 17.1

Southwest subdistrict----------------- 1 252 10.1 15.2 528 301 16.0 640 100– 10.3 938 27.1 1.8 204 20.4

St. John Island ----------------------- 604 9.1 22.5 134 667 18.2 267 100– 10.4 726 45.7 2.5 412 22.4

Central subdistrict ------------------- 103 11.7 10.7 21 638 16.2 56 100– 10.2 156 53.2 1.3 311 18.8

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- – – – – – – – – – – – –– –

Coral Bay subdistrict ----------------- 79 11.4 36.7 16 633 16.7 52 100– 10.3 55 34.5 3.6 363 18.5

Cruz Bay subdistrict ----------------- 412 8.3 22.8 96 700 19.0 151 100– 10.6 506 44.9 2.6 438 23.8

Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) ---------------- 412 8.3 22.8 96 700 19.0 151 100– 10.6 505 44.8 2.6 438 23.8

East End subdistrict ------------------ 10 – 20.0 1 850 – 8 100– 10.0 9 33.3 11.1 325 20.0

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 6 397 9.9 26.9 2 584 488 17.5 1 816 100– 10.6 9 248 29.7 4.0 386 22.5

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict ------------ 1 867 9.4 45.5 372 490 20.7 639 100– 10.6 4 904 23.4 6.2 340 22.4

Charlotte Amalie town -------------- 1 146 10.0 52.9 217 485 21.5 480 100– 10.6 3 032 22.7 7.6 311 21.5

Charlotte Amalie East CDP ----------- 165 4.2 34.5 21 517 16.7 15 100– 10.0 677 18.2 1.9 357 24.1

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ 556 9.7 33.6 134 491 20.3 144 100– 10.6 1 195 28.1 4.9 391 23.4

East End subdistrict ------------------ 1 011 12.2 20.3 301 611 20.8 345 100– 10.5 925 45.5 1.8 498 23.7

Northside subdistrict ----------------- 1 324 13.8 15.9 564 857 22.6 355 119 11.0 1 226 49.7 2.0 664 24.3

Southside subdistrict ----------------- 558 12.9 23.8 233 532 17.6 147 100– 10.4 903 32.1 1.9 354 21.6

Tutu subdistrict --------------------- 1 279 3.0 21.8 930 327 14.2 231 100– 10.9 1 125 18.2 .8 287 21.4

Anna’s Retreat CDP ---------------- 1 279 3.0 21.8 930 327 14.2 231 100– 10.9 1 125 18.2 .8 287 21.4

Water Island subdistrict --------------- 38 10.5 18.4 1 750 22.5 34 100– 10.0 48 66.7 2.1 525 20.3

Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) ------ – – – – – – – – – – – –– –

West End subdistrict ----------------- 320 10.9 11.3 183 535 15.1 65 100– 10.3 117 38.5 1.7 541 22.2

SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 15
TIPSII [UPF] GPH555 CENSUS90 71582600 03/ 22/ 93 2:02 PM MACHINE: C DATA:CENSUS90S*PH555TPDA78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:11 TAPE: NONE FRAME: 16

TSF:CENSUS90*92. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 UTF:CENSUS90*93. 03/ 04/ 93 17:04:33 META:CENSUS90S*PH555TBLS78. 03/ 04/ 93 17:05:09

Table 16. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990

[For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text]

Virgin Islands

Island

Census Subdistrict and

Place

All owner-occupied housing units

Percent with householder moved into unitm

Specified owner-occupied housing units

With a mortgage Not mortgaged

All renter-occupied housing units

Percent with householder moved into unitm

Specified renter paying cash rent

Total

1989 to

March

1990 1969 or earlier Total

Median

selected

monthly

owner

costs

(dollars)

Median

selected monthly

owner

costs as

a percentage of

household

income in

1989 Total

Median

selected

monthly

owner

costs

(dollars)

Median

selected monthly

owner

costs as

a percentage of

household

income in

1989 Total

1989 to

March

1990 1969 or earlier

Median gross

rent (dollars)

Median gross rent

as a percentage of

household

income in

1989

Virgin Islands ---------------- 14 272 10.3 23.3 5 512 411 16.8 5 628 100– 10.5 17 748 33.9 3.6 324 21.1

ISLAND

St. Croix Island ----------------------- 7 271 10.8 20.1 2 794 356 16.1 3 545 100– 10.4 7 774 37.8 3.1 240 18.7

St. John Island ----------------------- 604 9.1 22.5 134 667 18.2 267 100– 10.4 726 45.7 2.5 412 22.4

St. Thomas Island --------------------- 6 397 9.9 26.9 2 584 488 17.5 1 816 100– 10.6 9 248 29.7 4.0 386 22.5

CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE

Anna’s Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 800 7.4 18.1 343 396 16.0 343 100– 10.5 364 52.2 1.9 436 19.8

Anna’s Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ---- 1 279 3.0 21.8 930 327 14.2 231 100– 10.9 1 125 18.2 .8 287 21.4

Central subdistrict, St. John Island -------- 103 11.7 10.7 21 638 16.2 56 100– 10.2 156 53.2 1.3 311 18.8

Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island -- 1 146 10.0 52.9 217 485 21.5 480 100– 10.6 3 032 22.7 7.6 311 21.5

Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 1 867 9.4 45.5 372 490 20.7 639 100– 10.6 4 904 23.4 6.2 340 22.4

Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 165 4.2 34.5 21 517 16.7 15 100– 10.0 677 18.2 1.9 357 24.1

Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas

Island ----------------------------- 556 9.7 33.6 134 491 20.3 144 100– 10.6 1 195 28.1 4.9 391 23.4

Christiansted town, St. Croix Island ------- 152 12.5 53.3 27 450 18.0 73 100– 11.0 712 27.2 5.9 224 19.1

Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island --- 228 12.7 50.9 44 440 19.5 100 100– 11.2 873 31.0 5.2 237 19.2

Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 79 11.4 36.7 16 633 16.7 52 100– 10.3 55 34.5 3.6 363 18.5

Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ----------- 412 8.3 22.8 96 700 19.0 151 100– 10.6 505 44.8 2.6 438 23.8

Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island ------ 412 8.3 22.8 96 700 19.0 151 100– 10.6 506 44.9 2.6 438 23.8

East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island ------ 450 21.8 14.9 168 673 22.1 186 138 10.9 248 66.5 2.8 546 22.3

East End subdistrict, St. John Island ------- 10 – 20.0 1 850 – 8 100– 10.0 9 33.3 11.1 325 20.0

East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island----- 1 011 12.2 20.3 301 611 20.8 345 100– 10.5 925 45.5 1.8 498 23.7

Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island-------- 65 6.2 53.8 7 375 17.5 32 100– 10.8 346 38.2 2.3 237 19.6

Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ---- 295 7.8 39.3 79 357 15.0 164 100– 10.3 961 35.4 5.1 197 20.4

Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix

Island ----------------------------- 230 8.3 35.2 72 355 14.8 132 100– 10.3 615 33.8 6.7 175 21.1

Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island--------- 188 10.6 26.6 46 383 16.4 118 100– 10.8 546 14.8 1.8 119 15.0

Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 957 8.4 20.4 341 289 14.4 523 100– 10.2 603 38.3 7.0 246 18.1

Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 1 324 13.8 15.9 564 857 22.6 355 119 11.0 1 226 49.7 2.0 664 24.3

Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 589 13.1 23.3 169 395 16.8 334 100– 10.7 877 26.7 2.3 157 15.6

Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 1 960 9.9 18.8 880 353 15.5 804 100– 10.4 1 687 46.9 2.3 331 19.6

Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island---- 740 13.5 17.7 242 358 18.4 451 100– 10.4 1 223 38.1 1.4 176 17.1

Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 558 12.9 23.8 233 532 17.6 147 100– 10.4 903 32.1 1.9 354 21.6

Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island ----- 1 252 10.1 15.2 528 301 16.0 640 100– 10.3 938 27.1 1.8 204 20.4

Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island-------- 1 279 3.0 21.8 930 327 14.2 231 100– 10.9 1 125 18.2 .8 287 21.4

Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island - 38 10.5 18.4 1 750 22.5 34 100– 10.0 48 66.7 2.1 525 20.3

West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ---- 320 10.9 11.3 183 535 15.1 65 100– 10.3 117 38.5 1.7 541 22.2

16 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 75 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:03:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appa

APPENDIX A.

Area Classifications

CONTENTS

Area Measurement----------------------------------------- A–1

Block ----------------------------------------------------- A–2

Block Group (BG) ----------------------------------------- A–2

Block Numbering Area (BNA)------------------------------- A–2

Boundary Changes ---------------------------------------- A–2

Census Block (See Block)

Census Code (See Geographic Code)

Census Designated Place (CDP) (See Place)

Census Geographic Code (See Geographic Code)

Census Region and Census Division ----------------------- A–2

Census Subdistrict (See Island Subdivision)

Congressional District ------------------------------------- A–2

County (See Island)

County Subdivision (See Island Subdivision)

Crews of Vessels (See Area Measurement, see Block, see

Block Numbering Area)

Farm (See Urban and Rural)

Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Code

(See Geographic Code)

Geographic Block Group (See Block Group)

Geographic Code ----------------------------------------- A–3

Geographic Presentation ---------------------------------- A–3

Hierarchical Presentation (See Geographic Presentation)

Historical Counts ------------------------------------------ A–3

Incorporated Place (See Place)

Internal Point --------------------------------------------- A–4

Inventory Presentation (See Geographic Presentation)

Island ----------------------------------------------------- A–4

Island Subdivision ----------------------------------------- A–4

Land Area (See Area Measurement)

Latitude (See Internal Point)

Longitude (See Internal Point)

Minor Civil Division (See Island Subdivision)

Outlying Areas of the United States (See State, see United States)

Place ---------------------------------------------------- A–4

Population or Housing Unit Density ------------------------ A–4

Rural (See Urban and Rural)

State ----------------------------------------------------- A–4

Tabulation Block Group (See Block Group)

TIGER ---------------------------------------------------- A–5

Town (See Place)

United States --------------------------------------------- A–5

United States Postal Service (USPS) Code (See Geographic Code)

Urban and Rural ------------------------------------------ - A–5

Virgin Islands (See State)

Water Area (See Area Measurement)

These definitions are for all geographic entities and

concepts that the Census Bureau will include in its standard 1990 census data products for the Virgin Islands of the

United States (Virgin Islands). Not all entities and concepts

are shown in any one 1990 census data product. For a

description of geographic areas included in each data

product, see appendix F.

AREA MEASUREMENT

Area measurements provide the size, in square kilometers (also in square miles in printed reports), recorded for

each geographic entity for which the Census Bureau

tabulates data in general-purpose data products (except

crews-of-vessels entities). (Square kilometers may be divided

by 2.59 to convert an area measurement to square miles.)

Area was calculated from the specific set of boundaries

recorded for the entity in the Census Bureau’s geographic

data base (see ‘‘TIGER’’). On machine-readable files, area

measurements are shown to three decimal places; the

decimal point is implied. In printed reports and listings,

area measurements are shown to one decimal.

The Census Bureau provides measurements for both

land area and total water area for the 1990 census; the

water figure for the Virgin Islands includes inland, coastal,

and territorial water. (For the 1980 census, the Census

Bureau provided area measurements for land and inland

water.) The Census Bureau will provide measurements for

the component types of water for the affected entities in a

separate file. ‘‘Inland water’’ consists of any lake, reservoir, pond, or similar body of water that is recorded in the

Census Bureau’s geographic data base. It also includes

any river, creek, canal, stream, or similar feature that is

recorded in that data base as a two-dimensional feature

(rather than as a single line). The portions of the ocean,

related large embayments, and the Caribbean Sea that

belong to the United States and its territories are considered to be ‘‘coastal’’ and ‘‘territorial’’ waters. Streams and

bays that empty into these bodies of water are treated as

‘‘inland water’’ from the point beyond which they are

narrower than one nautical mile across. Identification of

land and inland, coastal, and territorial waters is for statistical purposes, and does not necessarily reflect legal

definitions thereof.

By definition, census blocks do not include water within

their boundaries; therefore, the water area of a block is

always zero. Land area measurements may disagree with

the information displayed on census maps and in the

TIGER File because, for area measurement purposes,

features identified as ‘‘intermittent water’’ are reported as

land area. For this reason, it may not be possible to derive

the land area for an entity by summing the land area of its

component census blocks. In addition, the water area

measurement reported for some geographic entities includes

water that is not included in any lower-level geographic

entity. Therefore, because water is contained only in a

higher-level geographic entity, summing the water measurements for all the component lower-level geographic

entities will not yield the water area of that higher-level

entity. This occurs, for example, where water is associated

with an island subdivision but is not assigned to any block

AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 74 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:03:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appa

numbering area. Crews-of-vessels entities (see ‘‘Block

Numbering Area’’ and ‘‘Block’’) do not encompass territory

and therefore have no area measurements.

The accuracy of any area measurement figure is limited

by the inaccuracy inherent in (1) the location and shape

of the various boundary features in the data base, and

(2) rounding affecting the last digit in all operations that

compute and/ or sum the area measurements.

BLOCK

Census blocks are small areas bounded on all sides by

visible features such as streets, roads, and streams, and

by invisible boundaries such as town limits, property lines,

and short, imaginary extensions of streets and roads.

Tabulation blocks, used in census data products, are in

most cases the same as collection blocks, used in the

census enumeration. In some cases, collection blocks

have been ‘‘split’’ into two or more parts required for data

tabulations. Tabulation blocks do not cross the boundaries

of census subdistricts, towns, or block numbering areas

(BNA’s). The 1990 census is the first for which the Virgin

Islands is block-numbered.

Blocks are numbered uniquely within each BNA. A block

is identified by a three-digit number, sometimes with a

single alphabetical suffix. Block numbers with suffixes

generally represent collection blocks that were ‘‘split’’ in

order to identify separate geographic entities that divide

the original block. For example, when a town limit runs

through data collection block 101, the data for the portion

inside the town is tabulated in block 101A and the portion

outside, in block 101B. A block number with the suffix ‘‘Z’’

represents a crews-of-vessels entity for which the Census

Bureau tabulates data, but that does not represent a true

geographic area; such a block is shown on census maps

associated with an anchor symbol and a BNA with a .99

suffix. Some block group records may not have any block

numbers associated with them; this occurs where the

entire area of the block group consists only of water.

BLOCK GROUP (BG)

Geographic Block Group

A geographic block group (BG) is a cluster of blocks

having the same first digit of their identifying numbers

within a block numbering area (BNA). For example, BG 3

within a BNA includes all blocks numbered between 301

and 397. In most cases, the numbering involves substantially fewer than 97 blocks. Geographic BG’s never cross

BNA boundaries, but may cross the boundaries of census

subdistricts and places. BG’s in the Virgin Islands were

structured to generally contain approximately 200 housing

units. Local officials delineated BG’s for the 1990 census,

using Census Bureau guidelines.

Tabulation Block Group

In the data tabulations, a geographic BG may be split to

present data for every unique combination of census

subdistrict and place shown in the data product; for

example, if BG 3 is partly in a town and partly outside the

town, there will be separate tabulated records for each

portion of BG 3. BG’s are used in tabulating decennial

census data throughout the Virgin Islands in the 1990

census. For purposes of data presentation, BG’s are a

substitute for the enumeration districts (ED’s) used for

reporting data throughout the Virgin Islands for previous

decennial censuses.

BLOCK NUMBERING AREA (BNA)

Block numbering areas (BNA’s) are small statistical

subdivisions of an island for grouping and numbering

blocks in the Virgin Islands. Local officials delineated

BNA’s for the 1990 census, using Census Bureau guidelines.

BNA’s are identified by a four-digit basic number and

may have a two-digit suffix; for example, 9901.07. The

decimal point separating the four-digit basic BNA number

from the two-digit suffix is shown in printed reports, in

microfiche, and on census maps; in machine-readable

files, the decimal point is implied. Many BNA’s do not have

a suffix; in such cases, the suffix field is left blank in all data

products. BNA numbers range from 9501 through 9989.99,

and are unique within an island. The suffix .99 identifies a

BNA that was populated entirely by persons aboard one or

more civilian ships. A crews-of-vessels BNA appears on

census maps only as an anchor symbol with its BNA

number (and block numbers on maps showing block

numbers); the BNA relates to the ships associated with the

onshore BNA’s having the same four-digit basic number.

Suffixes in the range .80 through .98 identify BNA’s that

either were revised or were created during the 1990

census data collection activities. Some of these revisions

produced BNA’s that have extremely small land area and

may have little or no population or housing. For data

analysis, such a BNA can be summarized with an adjacent

BNA.

BOUNDARY CHANGES

The boundaries of some places may have changed

between those reported for the 1980 census and January

1, 1990. The historical counts shown for such places are

not updated for such changes, and thus reflect the population and housing units in the area as delineated at each

census.

CENSUS REGION AND CENSUS DIVISION

For statistical purposes, the United States is divided into

four census regions, which are further subdivided into nine

divisions. The Virgin Islands is not assigned to any region

or division.

CONGRESSIONAL DISTRICT

The Virgin Islands is represented in the U.S. House of

Representatives by a nonvoting delegate.

A–2 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 73 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:03:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appa

GEOGRAPHIC CODE

Geographic codes are shown primarily on machinereadable data products, such as computer tape and compact disc-read only memory (CD-ROM), but also appear on

other products such as microfiche; they also are shown on

some census maps. Codes are identified as ‘‘census

codes’’ only if there also is a Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) code for the same geographic entity.

A code that is not identified as either ‘‘census’’ or ‘‘FIPS’’

usually is a census code for which there is no FIPS

equivalent or for which the Census Bureau does not use

the FIPS code. The exceptions, which use only the FIPS

code in census products, are island and congressional

district.

Census Code

Census codes are assigned for a variety of geographic

entities, including the Virgin Islands, island subdivision, and

place. The structure, format, and meaning of census codes

appear in the 1990 census Geographic Identification Code

Scheme and in the data dictionary portion of the technical

documentation for summary tape files, CD-ROM’s, and

microfiche.

Federal Information Processing Standards

(FIPS) Code

Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) codes

are assigned for a variety of geographic entities, including

congressional district, county (including statistically equivalent entities such as the islands in the Virgin Islands),

census subdistrict, place, and State (including statistically

equivalent entities such as the Virgin Islands). The structure, format, and meaning of FIPS codes used in the

census are shown in the 1990 census Geographic Identification Code Scheme and in the data dictionary portion of

the technical documentation for summarytape files,CD-ROM’s,

and microfiche.

The objective of the FIPS codes is to improve the use of

data resources of the Federal Government and avoid

unnecessary duplication and incompatibilities in the collection, processing, and dissemination of data. More information about FIPS and FIPS code documentation is available

from the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161.

United States Postal Service (USPS) Code

The United States Postal Service (USPS) code for the

Virgin Islands is used in all 1990 census data products. The

code is a two-character alphabetic abbreviation: VI. The

code is the same as the FIPS two-character alphabetic

abbreviation.

GEOGRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Hierarchical Presentation

A hierarchical geographic presentation shows the geographic entities in a superior/ subordinate structure in

census products. This structure is derived from the legal,

administrative, or areal relationships of the entities. The

hierarchical structure is depicted in report tables by means

of indentation, and is explained for machine-readable

media in the discussion of file structure in the geographic

coverage portion of the abstract in the technical documentation. An example of hierarchical presentation for the

Virgin Islands is the ‘‘standard census geographic hierarchy’’: block, within block group, within block numbering

area, within place, within census subdistrict, within island,

within the Virgin Islands. Graphically, this is shown as:

Virgin Islands of the United States

Island

Census subdistrict

Place (or part)

Block numbering area (or part)

Block group (or part)

Block

Inventory Presentation

An inventory presentation of geographic entities is one

in which all entities of the same type are shown in

alphabetical or code sequence, without reference to their

hierarchical relationships. Generally, an inventory presentation shows totals for entities that may be split in a

hierarchical presentation, such as place, block numbering

area, or block group. An example of a series of inventory

presentations is: Virgin Islands, followed by the three

islands, followed by all the places in the Virgin Islands.

Graphically, this is shown as:

Virgin Islands of the United States

Island ‘‘A’’

Island ‘‘B’’

Island ‘‘C’’

Place ‘‘X’’

Place ‘‘Y’’

Place ‘‘Z’’

HISTORICAL COUNTS

Historical counts for total population and total housing

units are shown in the 1990 CPH-2, Population and

Housing Unit Counts report series. As in past censuses,

the general rule for presenting historical data is to show

historical counts only for single, continually existing entities. Stated another way, if an entity existed for both the

current and preceding censuses, the tables show counts

for the preceding censuses. Included in this category are

entities of the same type (island, island subdivision, place)

even if they had changed their names. The historical

counts shown are for each entity as it was bounded at

each census.

In cases where an entity was formed since a preceding

census, such as a new place, the symbol three dots ‘‘...’’ is

shown for earlier censuses. The three-dot symbol also is

shown for those parts of a place that have extended into

an additional census subdistrict since the preceding census.

AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A–3
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 74 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:03:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appa

In some cases, population and housing unit counts for

individual areas were revised since publication of the 1980

reports (indicated by the prefix ‘‘r’’). In a number of tables

of 1990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts, 1980

counts are shown for aggregations of individual areas,

such as the number, population, and housing unit counts of

places in size groups, or urban and rural distributions.

Revisions of population and housing unit counts for individual areas were not applied to the various aggregations.

Therefore, it may not be possible to determine the individual areas in a given aggregation using the historical counts;

conversely, the sum of the counts shown for individual

areas may not agree with the aggregation.

INTERNAL POINT

An internal point is a set of geographic coordinates

(latitude and longitude) that is located within a specified

geographic entity. A single point is identified for each

entity; for many entities, this point may approximate the

geographic center of that entity. If the shape of the entity

caused this point to be located outside the boundaries of

the entity, it is relocated from the center so that it is within

the entity. By definition, the internal point for a block

cannot fall in a body of water. On machine-readable

products, internal points are shown to six decimal places;

the decimal point is implied.

ISLAND

The three major islands—St. Croix, St. John, and St.

Thomas—serve as the primary divisions of the Virgin

lslands. The Census Bureau, for statistical purposes, treats

each island as the equivalent of a county in the United

States. Each island is assigned a three-digit FIPS code, in

alphabetical order within the Virgin Islands.

ISLAND SUBDIVISION

‘‘Census subdisticts’’ are the primary subdivisions of the

Islands for the reporting of decennial census data. The

subdistricts were established by law by the Virgin Islands

government in 1979 and, therefore, the Census Bureau

treats them as ‘‘minor civil divisions’’ of the islands. Each

census subdistrict is assigned a three-digit census code in

alphabetical order within the island and a five-digit FIPS

code in alphabetical order within the Virgin Islands.

PLACE

For the reporting of decennial census data, places in the

Virgin Islands consist of census designated places and

incorporated places. Each place is assigned a four-digit

census code that is unique within the Virgin Islands. Each

place also is assigned a five-digit FIPS code that is unique

within the Virgin Islands. Both the census and FIPS codes

are assigned based on alphabetical order within the Virgin

Islands.

Census Designated Place (CDP)

Census designated places (CDP’s) are delineated for

the decennial census as the statistical counterparts of

incorporated places. CDP’s comprise densely settled concentrations of population that are identifiable by name, but

are not legally incorporated places. Their boundaries,

which usually coincide with visible features or the boundary

of an adjacent incorporated place, have no legal status,

nor do these places have officials elected to serve traditional municipal functions. CDP boundaries may change

with changes in the settlement pattern; a CDP with the

same name as in previous censuses does not necessarily

have the same boundaries.

Virgin Islands officials, following Census Bureau guidelines, first identified and delineated boundaries for CDP’s

for the 1980 census. In the 1990 census, the name of each

such place is followed by ‘‘CDP’’; in the 1980 census,

‘‘(CDP)’’ was used.

To qualify as a CDP for the 1990 census, a community

in the Virgin Islands must have 300 or more persons. The

CDP’s qualified on the basis of the population counts

prepared for the 1990 Postcensus Local Review Program.

Because these counts were subject to change, a few

CDP’s may have final population counts lower than the

required minimum.

Incorporated Place

The Census Bureau treats the three towns in the Virgin

Islands as incorporated places because they have legally

defined boundaries. However, the towns do not have their

own elected officials who can levy taxes and provide

municipal services.

POPULATION OR HOUSING UNIT DENSITY

Population or housing unit density is computed by

dividing the total population or housing units of a geographic unit (for example, the Virgin Islands, island, place)

by its land area measured in square kilometers or square

miles. Density is expressed as both ‘‘persons (or housing

units) per square kilometer’’ and ‘‘persons (or housing

units) per square mile’’ of land area in 1990 census printed

reports.

STATE

States are the primary governmental divisions of the

United States. The District of Columbia is treated as a

statistical equivalent of a State for census purposes. The

Census Bureau treats the Pacific Outlying Areas as States

A–4 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 74 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:03:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appa

for presenting 1990 census data. The Pacific Outlying

Areas include American Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Republic of

Palau, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands of the United

States.

Each State and equivalent entity is assigned a two-digit

numeric Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)

code in alphabetical order by State name, followed by the

outlying area names. Each State and equivalent entity also

is assigned a two-digit census code. This code is assigned

on the basis of the geographic sequence of each State

within each census division. The first digit of the code is the

code for the respective division except for Puerto Rico, the

Virgin Islands, and the Pacific Outlying Areas, which are

assigned ‘‘0’’ as the first digit because they are not part of

any division. Each State and equivalent area also is

assigned the two-letter FIPS/ United States Postal Service

(USPS) code.

TIGER

TIGER is an acronym for the new digital (computerreadable) geographic data base that automates the mapping and related geographic activities required to support

the Census Bureau’s census and survey programs. The

Census Bureau developed the Topologically Integrated

Geographic Encoding and Referencing (TIGER) System to

automate the geographic support processes needed to

meet the major geographic needs of the 1990 census:

producing the cartographic products to support data collection and map publication, providing the geographic

structure for tabulation and publication of the collected

data, assigning residential and employer addresses to their

geographic location and relating those locations to the

Census Bureau’s geographic units, and so forth. The

content of the TIGER data base is made available to the

public through a variety of ‘‘TIGER Extract’’ files that may

be obtained from the Data User Services Division, U.S.

Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233.

UNITED STATES

The United States comprises the 50 States and the

District of Columbia. In addition, the Census Bureau treats

the outlying areas (see ‘‘State’’) as statistical equivalents

of States for the 1990 census.

URBAN AND RURAL

The Census Bureau defines ‘‘urban’’ for the 1990

census of the Virgin Islands as comprising all territory,

population, and housing units in places of 2,500 or more

persons. Territory, population, and housing units not classified as urban constitute ‘‘rural.’’ In most data products,

‘‘rural’’ is divided into ‘‘places of less than 2,500’’ and ‘‘not

in places.’’ The ‘‘not in places’’ category comprises ‘‘rural’’

outside incorporated and census designated places. In

many data products, the term ‘‘other rural’’ is used; ‘‘other

rural’’ is a residual category specific to the classification of

the rural in each data product.

In some data products, rural population and housing

units are subdivided into ‘‘rural farm’’ and ‘‘rural nonfarm.’’

‘‘Rural farm’’ comprises all rural households and housing

units on farms (places from which $1,000 or more of

agricultural products were sold in 1989); ‘‘rural nonfarm’’

comprises the remaining rural.

The urban and rural classification cuts across the other

hierarchies; for example, there may be both urban and

rural territory within any island or census subdistrict.

AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A–5
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 195 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

APPENDIX B.

Definitions of Subject Characteristics

CONTENTS

POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS -------------------------- B–2

Ability to Speak English (See Language Spoken at Home and Ability

to Speak English)

Actual Hours Worked Last Week (See Employment Status)

Age ------------------------------------------------------- B–2

Ancestry -------------------------------------------------- B–2

Carpooling (See Journey to Work)

Children Ever Born (See Fertility)

Citizenship ------------------------------------------------ B–3

Civilian Labor Force (See Employment Status)

Class of Worker (See Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker)

Disability (See Mobility Limitation Status, see Self-Care Limitation

Status, see Work Disability Status)

Earnings in 1989 (See Income in 1989)

Educational Attainment ------------------------------------ B–4

Employment Status ---------------------------------------- B–5

Families (See Household Type and Relationship)

Family Composition (See Household Type and Relationship)

Family Income in 1989 (See Income in 1989)

Family Size (See Household Type and Relationship)

Family Type (See Household Type and Relationship)

Farm Population (See Farm Residence under Housing Characteristics)

Fertility---------------------------------------------------- B–6

Foreign-Born Persons (See Place of Birth)

Foster Children (See Household Type and Relationship)

Group Quarters -------------------------------------------- B–7

Hispanic Origin ------------------------------------------- B–10

Household (See Household Type and Relationship)

Household Income in 1989 (See Income in 1989)

Household Language (See Language Spoken At Home and Ability

to Speak English)

Household Size (See Household Type and Relationship)

Household Type and Relationship ------------------------- B–10

Householder (See Household Type and Relationship)

Income Deficit (See Poverty Status in 1989)

Income in 1989 ------------------------------------------- B–13

Income Type in 1989 (See Poverty Status in 1989)

Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker----------------- B–15

Institutionalized Persons (See Group Quarters)

Journey to Work------------------------------------------ B–18

Labor Force Status (See Employment Status)

Language Spoken at Home and Ability to Speak English---- B–19

Linguistic Isolation (See Language Spoken at Home and Ability

to Speak English)

Marital Status--------------------------------------------- B–21

Married Couples (See Marital Status)

Means of Transportation to Work (See Journey to Work)

Migration (See Residence in 1985)

Mobility Limitation Status --------------------------------- B–22

Nativity (See Place of Birth)

Noninstitutionalized Group Quarters (See Group Quarters)

Occupation (See Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker)

Own Children (See Household Type and Relationship)

Per Capita Income (See Income in 1989)

Period of Military Service (See Veteran Status)

Persons in Family (See Household Type and Relationship)

Persons in Households (See Household Type and Relationship)

Place of Birth--------------------------------------------- B–22

Place of Work (See Journey to Work)

Poverty Status in 1989 ------------------------------------ B–22

Presence of Children (See Household Type and Relationship)

Private Vehicle Occupancy (See Journey to Work)

Race ----------------------------------------------------- B–24

Reference Week ------------------------------------------ B–25

Related Children (See Household Type and Relationship)

Residence in 1985 ---------------------------------------- B–25

School Enrollment and Labor Force Status----------------- B–26

School Enrollment and Type of School -------------------- B–26

Self-Care Limitation Status -------------------------------- B–27

Sex ------------------------------------------------------ B–27

Spanish Origin (See Hispanic Origin)

Stepfamily (See Household Type and Relationship)

Subfamily (See Household Type and Relationship)

Time Leaving Home to Go to Work (See Journey to Work)

Travel Time to Work (See Journey to Work)

Type of School (See School Enrollment and Type of School)

Usual Hours Worked Per Week Worked in 1989 (See Work

Status in 1989)

Veteran Status ------------------------------------------- B–27

Weeks Worked in 1989 (See Work Status in 1989)

Work Disability Status ------------------------------------ B–28

Work Status in 1989 -------------------------------------- B–28

Worker (See Employment Status, see Industry, Occupation, and Class

of Worker, see Journey to Work, see Work Status in 1989)

Workers in Family in 1989 (See Work Status in 1989)

Year of Entry --------------------------------------------- B–29

Years of Military Service (See Veteran Status)

HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS----------------------------- B–30

Acreage -------------------------------------------------- B–30

Age of Structure (See Year Structure Built)

Agricultural Sales ----------------------------------------- B–31

Bedrooms ------------------------------------------------ B–31

Boarded-Up Status --------------------------------------- B–31

Business on Property ------------------------------------- B–31

Condominium Fee ---------------------------------------- B–31

Condominium Status-------------------------------------- B–32

Congregate Housing (See Meals Included in Rent)

Contract Rent -------------------------------------------- B–32

Cooking Fuel --------------------------------------------- B–33

Crop Sales (See Agricultural Sales)

Duration of Vacancy -------------------------------------- B–33

Farm Residence ------------------------------------------ B–33

Gross Rent - ---------------------------------------------- B–33

Gross Rent as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989- - B–34

Homeowner Vacancy Rate (See Vacancy Status)

Housing Units (See Living Quarters)

Insurance for Fire, Hazard, and Flood---------------------- B–34

Kitchen Facilities ----------------------------------------- B–34

Living Quarters ------------------------------------------- B–30

Meals Included in Rent------------------------------------ B–34

Mobile Home or Boat Costs ------------------------------- B–34

Months Vacant (See Duration of Vacancy)

Mortgage Payment---------------------------------------- B–34

Mortgage Status ------------------------------------------ B–35

Occupied Housing Units (See Living Quarters)

Owner-Occupied Housing Units (See Tenure)

Persons in Unit ------------------------------------------- B–35

Persons Per Room---------------------------------------- B–35

Plumbing Facilities---------------------------------------- B–36

Poverty Status of Households in 1989 --------------------- B–36

Purchase of Water From Water Vendor (See Source of Water)

Real Estate Taxes ---------------------------------------- B–36

Rental Vacancy Rate (See Vacancy Status)

Renter-Occupied Housing Units (See Tenure)

Rooms --------------------------------------------------- B–36

Second or Junior Mortgage Payment ---------------------- B–37

Selected Monthly Owner Costs ---------------------------- B–37

Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of

Household Income in 1989------------------------------ B–37

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 195 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

CONTENTS—Con.

Sewage Disposal ----------------------------------------- B–37

Source of Water ------------------------------------------ B–38

Telephone in Housing Unit -------------------------------- B–38

Tenure --------------------------------------------------- B–38

Type of Structure (See Units in Structure)

Units in Structure ----------------------------------------- B–39

Usual Home Elsewhere------------------------------------ B–39

Utilities--------------------------------------------------- B–39

Vacancy Status ------------------------------------------- B–39

Vacant Housing Units (See Living Quarters)

Value ---------------------------------------------------- B–40

Vehicles Available ---------------------------------------- B–41

Year Householder Moved Into Unit ------------------------ B–41

Year Structure Built--------------------------------------- B–41

DERIVED MEASURES ------------------------------------- B–41

Interpolation --------------------------------------------- B–41

Mean----------------------------------------------------- B–41

Median --------------------------------------------------- B–42

Percentages, Rates, and Ratios --------------------------- B–42

Quartile -------------------------------------------------- B–42

POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS

AGE

The data on age were derived from answers to questionnaire item 5, which was asked of all persons. The age

classification is based on the age of the person in completed years as of April 1, 1990. The age response in

question 5a was normally used to represent a person’s

age. However, when the age response was unacceptable

or unavailable, a person’s age was derived from an acceptable year of birth response in question 5b.

Data on age are used to determine the applicability of

other questions for a person and to classify other characteristics in census tabulations. Age data are needed to

interpret most social and economic characteristics used to

plan and examine many programs and policies. Therefore,

age is tabulated by single years of age and by many

different groupings, such as 5-year age groups.

Some tabulations are shown by the age of the householder. These data were derived from the age responses

for each householder. (For more information on householder, see the discussion under ‘‘Household Type and

Relationship.’’)

Median Age—This measure divides the age distribution

into two equal parts: one-half of the cases falling below the

median value and one-half above the value. Generally,

median age is computed on the basis of more detailed age

intervals than are shown in some census publications;

thus, a median based on a less detailed distribution may

differ slightly from a corresponding median for the same

population based on a more detailed distribution. (For

more information on medians, see the discussion under

‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Limitation of the Data—Counts in 1970 and 1980 for

persons 100 years old and over were substantially overstated. Improvements were made in the questionnaire

design and the allocation procedures to attempt to minimize this problem in 1990.

Review of detailed 1990 information indicated that

respondents tended to provide their age as of the date of

completion of the questionnaire, not their age as of April 1,

1990. In addition, there may have been a tendency for

respondents to round their age up if they were close to

having a birthday. It is likely that approximately 10 percent

of persons in most age groups are actually 1 year younger.

For most single years of age, the misstatements are

largely offsetting. The problem is most pronounced at

age 0 because persons lost to age 1 may not have been

fully offset by the inclusion of babies born after April 1,

1990 and because there may have been more rounding

up to age 1 to avoid reporting age as 0 years. (Age in

completed months was not collected for infants under

age 1.)

The reporting of age 1 year older than age on April 1,

1990 is likely to have been greater in areas where the

census data were collected later in 1990. The magnitude

of this problem was much less in the three previous

censuses where age was typically derived from respondent data on year of birth and quarter of birth. (For more

information on the design of the age question, see the

section below that discusses ‘‘Comparability.’’)

Comparability—Age data have been collected in every

census. For the first time since 1950, the 1990 data are not

available by quarter year of age. This change was made so

that coded information could be obtained for both age and

year of birth. In each census since 1950, the age of a

person was assigned when it was not reported. Since

1960, assignment of unknown age has been performed by

a general procedure described as ‘‘imputation.’’ The specific procedures for imputing age have been different in

each census. (For more information on imputation, see

Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.)

ANCESTRY

The data on ancestry were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 13, which was asked of all persons. The

question was based on self-identification; the data on

ancestry represent self-classification by people according

to the ancestry group(s) with which they most closely

identify. Ancestry refers to a person’s ethnic origin or

descent, ‘‘roots,’’ or heritage or the place of birth of the

person or the person’s parents or ancestors before their

arrival in the Virgin Islands of the United States.

The intent of the ancestry question was not to measure

the degree of attachment the respondent had to a particular ethnicity. For example, a response of ‘‘St. Thomian’’

might reflect total involvement in a ‘‘St. Thomian’’ community or only a memory of ancestors several generations

removed from the individual.

B–2 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

The Census Bureau coded the responses through an

edit and coding operation. The open-ended write-in ancestry item was coded into a numeric representation using a

code list containing over 1,000 categories. The 1990 code

list reflects the results of the Census Bureau’s own research

and consultations with many ethnic experts. Many decisions were made to determine the classification of responses.

These decisions affected the grouping of the tabulated

data.

The ancestry question allowed respondents to report

one or more ancestry groups. While a large number of

respondents listed a single ancestry, the majority of answers

included more than one ethnic entry. Generally, only the

first two responses reported were coded in 1990. If a

response was in terms of a dual ancestry, for example,

Dutch-British, the person was assigned two codes, in this

case one for Dutch and another for British.

However, in certain cases, multiple responses such as

‘‘Scotch-Irish’’ and ‘‘Black Dutch’’ were assigned a single

code reflecting their status as unique groups. If a person

reported one of these unique groups in addition to another

group, for example, ‘‘Scotch-Irish British,’’ resulting in

three terms, that person received one code for the unique

group (‘‘Scotch-Irish’’) and another one for the remaining

group (‘‘British’’). If a person reported ‘‘British Irish French,’’

only British and Irish were coded.

In all tabulations, when respondents provided an unacceptable ethnic identity (for example, an uncodeable or

unintelligible response such as ‘‘multi-national,’’ ‘‘adopted,’’

or ‘‘I have no idea’’), the answer was included in ‘‘Ancestry

not reported.’’

The tabulations on ancestry are presented using two

types of data presentations—one used total persons as

the base, and the other used total responses as the base.

The following are categories shown in the two data presentations:

Presentation Based on Persons:

Single Ancestries Reported—Includes all persons

who reported only one ethnic group. Included in this

category are persons with multiple-term responses

such as ‘‘Scotch-Irish’’ who are assigned a single

code.

Multiple Ancestries Reported—Includes all persons

who reported more than one group and were assigned

two ancestry codes.

Ancestry Unclassified—Includes all persons who provided a response that could not be assigned an

ancestry code because they provided nonsensical

entries or religious responses.

Presentations Based on Responses:

Total Ancestries Reported—Includes the total number of ancestries reported and coded. If a person

reported a multiple ancestry such as ‘‘French Dutch,’’

that response was counted twice in the tabulations—

once in the ‘‘French’’ category and again in the

‘‘Dutch’’ category. Thus, the sum of the counts in this

type of presentation is not the total population but the

total of all responses.

First Ancestry Reported—Includes the first response

of all persons who reported at least one codeable

entry. For example, in this category, the count for

‘‘Dutch’’ would include all those who reported only

Dutch and those who reported Dutch first and then

some other group.

Second Ancestry Reported—Includes the second

response of all persons who reported a multiple

ancestry. Thus, the count for ‘‘Dutch’’ in this category

includes all persons who reported Dutch as the

second response, regardless of the first response

provided.

The Census Bureau identified hundreds of ethnic groups

in the 1990 census. However, it was impossible to show

information for every group in all census tabulations because

of space constraints. In addition, groups identified specifically in the questions on race and Hispanic origin (for

example, Japanese, Laotian, Mexican, Cuban, and Spaniard), in general, are not shown separately in ancestry

tabulations.

Limitation of the Data—Although some experts consider

religious affiliation a component of ethnic identity, the

ancestry question was not designed to collect any information concerning religion. The Bureau of the Census is

prohibited from collecting information on religion. Thus, if a

religion was given as an answer to the ancestry question,

it was coded as an ‘‘Other’’ response.

Comparability—A question on ancestry was first asked in

the 1990 census. Although there were no comparable data

prior to this census, related information on ethnicity was

collected through questions on parental birthplace, own

birthplace, and language which were included in previous

censuses. Unlike other census questions, there was no

imputation for nonresponse to the ancestry question.

Categories such as ‘‘Arab’’ and ‘‘West Indian’’ were

included in the 1990 question to meet important data

needs. The ‘‘West Indian’’ category excluded ‘‘Hispanic’’

groups such as ‘‘Puerto Rican’’ and ‘‘Cuban’’ that were

identified primarily through the question on Hispanic origin.

CITIZENSHIP

The data on citizenship were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 9, which was asked of all persons.

Citizen—Persons who indicated that they were nativeborn and foreign-born persons who indicated that they

have become naturalized. (For more information on native

and foreign born, see the discussion under ‘‘Place of

Birth.’’)

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–3
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

There are four categories of citizenship: (1) born in the

U.S. Virgin Islands, (2) born in the United States, Puerto

Rico, Guam, or the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, (3) born abroad of American parents, and (4)

citizen by naturalization.

Naturalized Citizen—Foreign-born persons who had

completed the naturalization process at the time of

the census and upon whom the rights of citizenship

had been conferred.

Not a Citizen—Foreign-born persons who were not citizens, including persons who had begun but not completed

the naturalization process at the time of the census.

Limitation of the Data—Evaluation studies completed

after previous censuses indicated that some persons may

have reported themselves as citizens although they had

not yet attained the status.

Comparability—Similar questions on citizenship were asked

in the censuses of 1950, 1970, and 1980. In 1990, both

native and foreign-born persons were asked to respond to

the citizenship question.

EDUCATIONAL ATTAINMENT

Data on educational attainment were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 12. Data are tabulated as

attainment for persons 15 years old and over. Persons are

classified according to the highest level of school completed or the highest degree received. The question included

instructions to report the level of the previous grade

attended or the highest degree received for persons

currently enrolled in school. The question included response

categories which allowed persons to report completing the

12th grade without receiving a high school diploma, and

which instructed respondents to report as ‘‘high school

graduate(s)’’ persons who received either a high school

diploma or the equivalent, for example, passed the Test of

General Educational Development (G.E.D.), and did not

attend college. (On the Military Census Report questionnaire, the lowest response category was ‘‘Less than 9th

grade.’’)

Interviewers were instructed that schooling completed

in foreign or ungraded school systems should be reported

as the equivalent level of schooling in the regular American

system; that vocational certificates or diplomas from vocational, trade, or business schools or colleges were not to

be reported unless they were college level degrees; and

that honorary degrees were not to be reported. The

instructions gave ‘‘medicine, dentistry, chiropractic, optometry, osteopathic medicine, pharmacy, podiatry, veterinary

medicine, law, and theology’’ as examples of professional

school degrees, and specifically excluded ‘‘barber school,

cosmetology, or other training for a specific trade’’ from

the professional school category. The order in which they

were listed suggested that doctorate degrees were ‘‘higher’’

than professional school degrees, which were ‘‘higher’’

than master’s degrees.

Persons who did not report educational attainment were

assigned the attainment of a person of the same age, race

or Hispanic origin, and sex who resided in the same or a

nearby area. Persons who filled more than one circle were

edited to the highest level or degree reported.

High School Graduate or Higher—Includes persons

whose highest degree was a high school diploma or

its equivalent, persons who attended college or professional school, and persons who received a college, university, or professional degree. Persons who

reported completing the 12th grade but not receiving

a diploma are not included.

Not Enrolled, Not High School Graduate—Includes

persons of compulsory school attendance age or

above who were not enrolled in school and were not

high school graduates; these persons may be taken

to be ‘‘high school dropouts.’’ There is no restriction

on when they ‘‘dropped out’’ of school, and they may

have never attended high school.

In prior censuses, ‘‘Median school years completed’’

was used as a summary measure of educational attainment. In 1990, the median can only be calculated for

groups of which less than half the members have attended

college. ‘‘Percent high school graduate or higher’’ and

‘‘Percent bachelor’s degree or higher’’ are summary measures which can be calculated from the present data and

offer quite readily interpretable measures of differences

between population subgroups. To make comparisons

over time, ‘‘Percent high school graduate or higher’’ can be

calculated and ‘‘Percent bachelor’s degree or higher’’ can

be approximated with data from previous censuses.

Comparability—Educational attainment questions in terms

of years of school completed were included on the census

from 1950 to 1980. In 1950, a single question was asked

on highest grade of school completed. In the censuses of

1960 through 1980, a two-part question asking highest

grade of school attended and whether that grade was

finished was used to construct highest grade or year of

school completed. For persons who have not attended

college, the response categories in the 1990 educational

attainment question should produce data which are comparable to data on highest grade completed from earlier

censuses.

The response categories for persons who have attended

college were modified from earlier censuses because

there was some ambiguity in interpreting responses in

terms of the number of years of college completed. For

instance, it was not clear whether ‘‘completed the fourth

year of college,’’ ‘‘completed the senior year of college,’’

B–4 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

and ‘‘college graduate’’ were synonymous. Research conducted shortly before the census suggests that these

terms were more distinct in 1990 than in earlier decades,

and this change may have threatened the ability to estimate the number of ‘‘college graduates’’ from the number

of persons reported as having completed the fourth or a

higher year of college. It was even more difficult to make

inferences about post-baccalaureate degrees and ‘‘Associate’’ degrees from highest year of college completed.

Thus, comparisons of post-secondary educational attainment in this and earlier censuses should be made with

great caution.

In the 1960 and subsequent censuses, persons for

whom educational attainment was not reported were assigned

the same attainment level as a similar person whose

residence was in the same or a nearby area. In the 1950

censuses, persons for whom educational attainment was

not reported were not allocated.

EMPLOYMENT STATUS

The data on employment status were derived from

answers to questionnaire items 21, 25, and 26, which were

asked of all persons. The series of questions on employment status was asked of all persons 15 years old and

over and was designed to identify, in this sequence: (1)

persons who worked at any time during the reference

week; (2) persons who did not work during the reference

week but who had jobs or businesses from which they

were temporarily absent (excluding layoff); (3) persons on

layoff; and (4) persons who did not work during the

reference week, but who were looking for work during the

last four weeks and were available for work during the

reference week. (For more information, see the discussion

under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

The employment status data shown in this and other

1990 census tabulations relate to persons 16 years old

and over. Some tabulations showing employment status,

however, include persons 15 years old. By definition, these

persons are classified as ‘‘Not in Labor Force’’. In the

1940, 1950, and 1960 censuses, employment status data

were presented for persons 14 years old and over. The

change in the universe was made in 1970 to agree with the

official measurement of the labor force as revised in

January 1967 by the U.S. Department of Labor. The 1970

census was the last to show employment data for persons

14 and 15 years old.

Employed—All civilians 16 years old and over who were

either (1) ‘‘at work’’—those who did any work at all during

the reference week as paid employees, worked in their

own business or profession, worked on their own farm, or

worked 15 hours or more as unpaid workers on a family

farm or in a family business; or (2) were ‘‘with a job but not

at work’’—those who did not work during the reference

week but had jobs or businesses from which they were

temporarily absent due to illness, bad weather, industrial

dispute, vacation, or other personal reasons. Excluded

from the employed are persons whose only activity consisted of work around the house or unpaid volunteer work

for religious, charitable, and similar organizations; also

excluded are persons on active duty in the United States

Armed Forces.

Unemployed—All civilians 16 years old and over are

classified as unemployed if they (1) were neither ‘‘at work’’

nor ‘‘with a job but not at work’’ during the reference week,

and (2) were looking for work during the last 4 weeks, and

(3) were available to accept a job. Also included as

unemployed are civilians who did not work at all during the

reference week and were waiting to be called back to a job

from which they had been laid off. Examples of job seeking

activities are:

• Registering at a public or private employment office

• Meeting with prospective employers

• Investigating possibilities for starting a professional

practice or opening a business

• Placing or answering advertisements

• Writing letters of application

• Being on a union or professional register

Civilian Labor Force—Consists of persons classified as

employed or unemployed in accordance with the criteria

described above.

Experienced Unemployed—These are unemployed persons who have worked at any time in the past.

Experienced Civilian Labor Force—Consists of the employed

and the experienced unemployed.

Labor Force—All persons classified in the civilian labor

force plus members of the U.S. Armed Forces (persons on

active duty with the United States Army, Air Force, Navy,

Marine Corps, or Coast Guard).

Not in Labor Force—All persons 16 years old and over

who are not classified as members of the labor force. This

category consists mainly of students, housewives, retired

workers, seasonal workers enumerated in an off season

who were not looking for work, institutionalized persons,

and persons doing only incidental unpaid family work (less

than 15 hours during the reference week).

Worker—This term appears in connection with several

subjects: journey-to-work items, class of worker, weeks

worked in 1989, and number of workers in family in 1989.

Its meaning varies and, therefore, should be determined in

each case by referring to the definition of the subject in

which it appears.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–5
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Actual Hours Worked Last Week—All persons who

reported working during the reference week were asked to

report in questionnaire item 21b the number of hours that

they worked. The statistics on hours worked pertain to the

number of hours actually worked at all jobs, and do not

necessarily reflect the number of hours typically or usually

worked or the scheduled number of hours. The concept of

‘‘actual hours’’ differs from that of ‘‘usual hours’’ described

below. The number of persons who worked only a small

number of hours is probably understated since such persons sometimes consider themselves as not working.

Respondents were asked to include overtime or extra

hours worked, but to exclude lunch hours, sick leave, and

vacation leave.

Limitation of the Data—The census may understate the

number of employed persons because persons who have

irregular, casual, or unstructured jobs sometimes report

themselves as not working. The number of employed

persons ‘‘at work’’ is probably overstated in the census

(and conversely, the number of employed ‘‘with a job, but

not at work’’ is understated) since some persons on

vacation or sick leave erroneously reported themselves as

working. This problem has no effect on the total number of

employed persons. The reference week for the employment data is not the same for all persons. Since persons

can change their employment status from one week to

another, the lack of a uniform reference week may mean

that the employment data do not reflect the reality of the

employment situation of any given week. (For more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

Comparability—The questionnaire items and employment

status concepts for the 1990 census are essentially the

same as those used in the 1980 and 1970 censuses.

However, these concepts differ in many respects from

those associated with the 1950 and 1960 censuses.

Since employment data from the census are obtained

from respondents in households, they differ from statistics

based on reports from individual business establishments,

farm enterprises, and certain government programs. Persons employed at more than one job are counted only

once in the census and are classified according to the job

at which they worked the greatest number of hours during

the reference week. In statistics based on reports from

business and farm establishments, persons who work for

more than one establishment may be counted more than

once. Moreover, some tabulations may exclude private

household workers, unpaid family workers, and self-employed

persons, but may include workers less than 16 years of

age.

An additional difference in the data arises from the fact

that persons who had a job but were not at work are

included with the employed in the census statistics, whereas

many of these persons are likely to be excluded from

employment figures based on establishment payroll reports.

Furthermore, the employment status data in census tabulations include persons on the basis of place of residence

regardless of where they work, whereas establishment

data report persons at their place of work regardless of

where they live. This latter consideration is particularly

significant when comparing data for workers who commute

between areas.

Census data on actual hours worked during the reference week may differ from data from other sources. The

census measures hours actually worked, whereas some

surveys measure hours paid for by employers. Comparability of census actual hours worked data may also be

affected by the nature of the reference week (see ‘‘Reference Week’’).

For several reasons, the unemployment figures of the

Census Bureau may not be comparable with published

figures on unemployment compensation claims. For example, figures on unemployment compensation claims may

exclude persons who have exhausted their benefit rights,

new workers who have not earned rights to unemployment

insurance, and persons losing jobs not covered by unemployment insurance systems (including some workers in

agriculture, domestic services, and religious organizations,

and self-employed and unpaid family workers). In addition,

the qualifications for drawing unemployment compensation may differ from the definition of unemployment used

by the Census Bureau. Persons working only a few hours

during the week and persons with a job but not at work are

sometimes eligible for unemployment compensation but

are classified as ‘‘Employed’’ in the census. Differences in

the geographical distribution of unemployment data arise

because the place where claims are filed may not necessarily be the same as the place of residence of the

unemployed worker.

FERTILITY

The data on fertility (also referred to as ‘‘children ever

born’’) were derived from answers to questionnaire item

20, which was asked of all women 15 years old and over

regardless of marital status. Stillbirths, stepchildren, and

adopted children were excluded from the number of children ever born. Ever-married women were instructed to

include all children born to them before and during their

most recent marriage, children no longer living, and children away from home, as well as children who were still

living in the home. Never-married women were instructed

to include all children born to them.

Data are most frequently presented in terms of the

aggregate number of children ever born to women in the

specified category and in terms of the rate per 1,000

women. For purposes of calculating the aggregate, the

open-ended response category, ‘‘12 or more’’ is assigned

a value of 13.

Limitation of the Data—The user is cautioned that the

data may be less complete for out-of-wedlock births than

for births occurring within marriage.

B–6 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Comparability—The wording of the question on children

ever born was the same in 1990 as in 1980. In 1970,

however, the question on children ever born was asked

only of ever-married women. Data presented for children

ever born to ever-married women are comparable for the

1990 census and all previous censuses containing this

question.

GROUP QUARTERS

All persons not living in households are classified by the

Census Bureau as living in group quarters. Two general

categories of persons in group quarters are recognized:

(1) institutionalized persons and (2) other persons in group

quarters (also referred to as ‘‘noninstitutional group quarters’’).

Institutionalized Persons—Includes persons under formally authorized, supervised care or custody in institutions

at the time of enumeration. Such persons are classified as

‘‘patients or inmates’’ of an institution regardless of the

availability of nursing or medical care, the length of stay, or

the number of persons in the institution. Generally, institutionalized persons are restricted to the institutional buildings and grounds (or must have passes or escorts to

leave) and thus have limited interaction with the surrounding community. Also, they are generally under the care of

trained staff who have responsibility for their safekeeping

and supervision.

Type of Institution—The type of institution was determined as part of census enumeration activities. For institutions which specialize in only one specific type of service, all patients or inmates were given the same classification.

For institutions which had multiple types of major services

(usually general hospitals and Veterans’ Administration

hospitals), patients were classified according to selected

types of wards. For example, in psychiatric wards of

hospitals, patients were classified in ‘‘mental (psychiatric)

hospitals’’; in hospital wards for persons with chronic

diseases, patients were classified in ‘‘hospitals for the

chronically ill.’’ Each patient or inmate was classified in

only one type of institution. Institutions include the following types:

Correctional Institutions—Includes police lockups, halfway houses, local jails, and other confinement facilities,

including work farms.

Police Lockups—Temporary-holding facilities operated by the island police that hold persons for 48

hours or less only if they have not been formally

charged in court.

Halfway Houses—Operated for correctional purposes

and include probation and restitution centers, prerelease centers, and community-residential centers.

Local Jails and Other Confinement Facilities—Includes facilities operated by the islands that primarily

hold persons beyond arraignment, usually for more

than 48 hours. Also included in this category are work

farms used to hold persons awaiting trial or serving

time on relatively short sentences and jails run by

private businesses under contract.

Other Types of Correctional Institutions—Privately

operated correctional facilities and correctional facilities specifically for alcohol/ drug abuse.

Nursing Homes—Comprises a heterogeneous group of

places. The majority of patients are elderly, although

persons who require nursing care because of chronic

physical conditions may be found in these homes

regardless of their age. Included in this category are

skilled-nursing facilities, intermediate-care facilities, longterm care rooms in wards or buildings on the grounds of

hospitals, or long-term care rooms/ nursing wings in

congregate housing facilities. Also included are nursing,

convalescent, and rest homes, with or without nursing

care.

Mental (Psychiatric) Hospitals—Includes hospitals or

wards for the criminally insane not operated by a prison,

and psychiatric wards of general hospitals and veterans’

hospitals. Patients receive supervised medical/ nursing

care from formally-trained staff.

Hospitals for Chronically Ill—Includes hospitals for patients

who require long-term care, or other hospitals or wards

for the chronically ill, which include tuberculosis hospitals or wards, wards in general and Veterans’ Administration hospitals for the chronically ill, neurological wards,

hospices, wards for patients with Hansen’s Disease

(leprosy) and other incurable diseases, and other unspecified wards for the chronically ill. Patients who had no

usual home elsewhere were enumerated as part of the

institutional population in the wards of general and

military hospitals. Most hospital patients are at the

hospital temporarily and were enumerated at their usual

place of residence. (For more information, see ‘‘Wards

in General Hospitals for Patients Who Have No Usual

Home Elsewhere.’’)

Schools, Hospitals, or Wards for the Mentally Retarded—Includes those institutions such as wards in hospitals for the mentally retarded, and intermediate-care

facilities for the mentally retarded that provide supervised medical/ nursing care from formally-trained staff.

Schools, Hospitals, or Wards for the Physically Handicapped—Includes three types of institutions: institutions

for the blind, those for the deaf, and orthopedic wards

and institutions for the physically handicapped. Institutions for persons with speech problems are classified

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–7
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

with ‘‘institutions for the deaf.’’ The category ‘‘orthopedic wards and institutions for the physically handicapped’’ includes those institutions providing relatively

long-term care to accident victims, and to persons with

polio, cerebral palsy, and muscular dystrophy. In some

census products, this category is classified by type of

ownership as ‘‘Public,’’ ‘‘Private,’’ and ‘‘Ownership not

known.’’

Hospitals, and Wards for Drug/ Alcohol Abuse—Includes

hospitals, and hospital wards in psychiatric and general

hospitals. These facilities are equipped medically and

designed for the diagnosis and treatment of medical or

psychiatric illnesses associated with alcohol or drug

abuse. Patients receive supervised medical care from

formally-trained staff.

Wards in General Hospitals for Patients Who Have No

Usual Home Elsewhere—Includes maternity, neonatal,

pediatric (including wards for boarder babies), and surgical wards of hospitals, and wards for infectious diseases.

Juvenile Institutions—Includes homes, schools, and other

institutions providing care for children (short- or longterm care). Juvenile institutions include the following

types:

Homes for Abused, Dependent, and Neglected Children—Includes orphanages and other institutions

which provide long-term care (usually more than 30

days) for children. This category is classified in some

census products by type of ownership as ‘‘Public’’

and ‘‘Private.’’

Residential Treatment Centers—Includes those institutions which primarily serve children who, by clinical

diagnosis, are moderately or seriously disturbed emotionally. Also, these institutions provide long-term

treatment services, usually supervised or directed by

a psychiatrist.

Training Schools for Juvenile Delinquents—Includes

residential training schools or homes, and industrial

schools, camps, or farms for juvenile delinquents.

Public Training Schools for Juvenile Delinquents—

Usually operated by a government agency (for

example, department of welfare, corrections, or a

youth authority). These public training schools are

specialized institutions serving delinquent children,

generally between the ages of 10 and 17 years

old, all of whom are committed by the courts.

Private Training Schools—Operated under private

auspices. Some of the children they serve are

committed by the courts as delinquents. Others

are referred by parents or social agencies because

of delinquent behavior. One difference between

private and public training schools is that, by their

administrative policy, private schools have control

over their selection and intake.

Other Persons in Group Quarters (also referred to as

‘‘noninstitutional group quarters’’)—Includes all persons who live in group quarters other than institutions.

Persons who live in the following living quarters are

classified as ‘‘other persons in group quarters’’ when there

are 10 or more unrelated persons living in the unit;

otherwise, these living quarters are classified as housing

units.

Rooming Houses—Includes persons residing in rooming and boarding houses and living in quarters with 10 or

more unrelated persons.

Group Homes—Includes ‘‘community-based homes’’

that provide care and supportive services. Such places

include homes for the mentally ill, mentally retarded,

and physically handicapped; drug/ alcohol halfway houses;

communes; and maternity homes for unwed mothers.

Homes for the Mentally Ill—Includes communitybased homes that provide care primarily for the

mentally ill. Homes which combine treatment of the

physically handicapped with treatment of the mentally ill are counted as homes for the mentally ill.

Homes for the Mentally Retarded—Includes communitybased homes that provide care primarily for the

mentally retarded. Homes which combine treatment

of the physically handicapped with treatment of the

mentally retarded are counted as homes for the

mentally retarded.

Homes for the Physically Handicapped—Includes

community-based homes for the blind, for the deaf,

and other community-based homes for the physically

handicapped. Persons with speech problems are

classified with homes for the deaf. In some census

products, this category is classified by type of ownership as ‘‘Public,’’ ‘‘Private,’’ or ‘‘Ownership not

known.’’

Homes or Halfway Houses for Drug/ Alcohol Abuse—Includes persons with no usual home elsewhere in

places that provide community-based care and supportive services to persons suffering from a drug/ alcohol addiction and to recovering alcoholics and drug

abusers. Places providing community-based care for

drug and alcohol abusers include group homes,

detoxification centers, quarterway houses (residential treatment facilities that work closely with accredited hospitals), halfway houses, and recovery homes

for ambulatory, mentally competent recovering alcoholics and drug abusers who may be re-entering the

work force.

B–8 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 9 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Maternity Homes for Unwed Mothers—Includes persons with no usual home elsewhere in places that

provide domestic care for unwed mothers and their

children. These homes may provide social services

and post-natal care within the facility, or may make

arrangements for women to receive such services in

the community. Nursing services are usually available

in the facility.

Other Group Homes—Includes persons with no usual

home elsewhere in communes, foster care homes,

and job corps centers with 10 or more unrelated

persons. These types of places provide communal

living quarters, generally for persons who have formed

their own community in which they have common

interests and often share or own property jointly.

Religious Group Quarters—Includes, primarily, group

quarters for nuns teaching in parochial schools and for

priests living in rectories. It also includes other convents

and monasteries, except those associated with a general hospital or an institution.

College Quarters Off Campus—Includes privately-owned

rooming and boarding houses off campus, if the place is

reserved exclusively for occupancy by college students

and if there are 10 or more unrelated persons. In census

products, persons in this category are classified as living

in a college dormitory.

Persons residing in certain other types of living arrangements are classified as living in ‘‘noninstitutional group

quarters’’ regardless of the number of people sharing the

unit. These include persons residing in the following types

of group quarters:

College Dormitories—Includes college students in dormitories (provided the dormitory is restricted to students

who do not have their families living with them), fraternity and sorority houses, and on-campus residential

quarters used exclusively for those in religious orders

who are attending college. Students in privately-owned

rooming and boarding houses off campus are also

included, if the place is reserved exclusively for occupancy by college-level students and if there are 10 or

more unrelated persons.

Shelters for Runaway, Neglected, and Homeless Children—Includes shelters/ group homes which provide

temporary sleeping facilities for juveniles.

Shelters for Abused Women (Shelters Against Domestic Violence or Family Crisis Centers)—Includes communitybased homes or shelters that provide domiciliary care

for women who have sought shelter from family violence and who may have been physically abused. Most

shelters also provide care for children of abused women.

These shelters may provide social services, meals,

psychiatric treatment, and counseling. In some census

products, ‘‘shelters for abused women’’ are included in

the category ‘‘other noninstitutional group quarters.’’

Dormitories for Nurses and Interns in General Hospitals—Includes group quarters for nurses and other staff

members. It excludes patients.

Crews of Maritime Vessels—Includes officers, crew

members, and passengers of Maritime U.S. flag vessels. All ocean-going ships are included.

Staff Residents of Institutions—Includes staff residing in

group quarters on institutional grounds who provide

formally-authorized, supervised care or custody for the

institutionalized population.

Living Quarters for Victims of Natural Disasters—Includes living quarters for persons temporarily displaced

by natural disasters.

Limitation of the Data—Two types of errors can occur in

the classification of ‘‘types of group quarters’’:

1. Misclassification of Group Quarters—During the 1990

Special Place Prelist operation, the enumerator determined the type of group quarters associated with each

special place in their assignment. The enumerator

used the Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List and

Index to the Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List to

assign a two-digit code number followed by either an

‘‘I,’’ for institutional, or an ‘‘N,’’ for noninstitutional to

each group quarters. In 1990, unacceptable group

quarter codes were edited. (For more information on

editing of unacceptable data, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.)

2. No Classification (unknowns)— Improvements were

made to the 1990 Alphabetical Group Quarters Code

List; that is, the inclusion of more group quarters

categories and an ‘‘Index to the Alphabetical Group

Quarters Code List.’’

Comparability—For the 1990 census, the definition of

institutionalized persons was revised so that the definition

of ‘‘care’’ only includes persons under organized medical

or formally-authorized, supervised care or custody. As a

result of this change to the institutional definition, maternity

homes are classified as noninstitutional rather than institutional group quarters as in previous censuses. The

following types of other group quarters are classified as

institutional rather than noninstitutional group quarters:

‘‘halfway houses (operated for correctional purposes)’’

and ‘‘wards in general and military hospitals for patients

who have no usual home elsewhere,’’ which includes

maternity, neonatal, pediatric, and surgical wards of hospitals, other-purpose wards of hospitals, and wards for

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–9
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 10 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

persons with infectious diseases. These changes should

not significantly affect the comparability of data with earlier

censuses because of the relatively small number of persons involved.

As in 1980, 10 or more unrelated persons living together

were classified as living in noninstitutional group quarters.

In 1970, the criteria was six or more unrelated persons.

Several changes also have occurred in the identification

of specific types of group quarters. For the first time, the

1990 census identifies separately the following types of

correctional institutions: persons in halfway houses (operated for correctional purposes) and police lockups. In

1990, tuberculosis hospitals or wards are included with

hospitals for the chronically ill; in 1980, they were shown

separately. For 1990, the noninstitutional group quarters

category, ‘‘Group homes’’ is further classified as: group

homes for drug/ alcohol abuse; maternity homes (for unwed

mothers), group homes for the mentally ill, group homes

for the mentally retarded, and group homes for the physically handicapped. Persons living in communes and fostercare homes are classified with ‘‘Other group homes’’ only

if 10 or more unrelated persons share the unit; otherwise,

they are classified as housing units.

In 1990 census data products, the phrase ‘‘inmates of

institutions’’ was changed to ‘‘institutionalized persons.’’

Also, persons living in noninstitutional group quarters were

referred to as ‘‘other persons in group quarters,’’ and the

phrase ‘‘staff residents’’ was used for staff living in institutions.

In 1990, there are additional institutional categories and

noninstitutional group quarters categories compared with

the 1980 census. The institutional categories added include

‘‘hospitals and wards for drug/ alcohol abuse’’ and ‘‘hospitals for the chronically ill.’’ The noninstitutional group

quarters categories added include shelters for runaway,

neglected, and homeless children and shelters for abused

women.

HISPANIC ORIGIN

The data on Spanish/ Hispanic origin were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 7, which was asked of all

persons. Persons of Hispanic origin are those who classified themselves in one of the specific Hispanic origin

categories listed on the questionnaire—‘‘Dominican (Dominican Republic),’’ ‘‘Puerto Rican,’’ or ‘‘Cuban’’—as well as

those who indicated that they were of ‘‘other Spanish/ Hispanic’’ origin. Persons of ‘‘Other Spanish/ Hispanic’’ origin

are those whose origins are from Spain, the Spanishspeaking countries of Central or South America, or they

are persons of Hispanic origin identifying themselves generally as Spanish, Spanish-American, Hispanic, Hispano,

Latino, and so on.

Origin can be viewed as the ancestry, nationality group,

lineage, or country of birth of the person or the person’s

parents or ancestors before their arrival in the Virgin

Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands). Persons of

Hispanic origin may be of any race.

Some tabulations are shown by the Hispanic origin of

the householder. In all cases where households, families,

or occupied housing units are classified by Hispanic origin,

the Hispanic origin of the householder is used. (See the

discussion of householder under ‘‘Household Type and

Relationship.’’)

During direct interviews conducted by enumerators, if a

person could not provide a single origin response, he or

she was asked to select, based on self-identification, the

group which best described his or her origin or descent. If

a person could not provide a single group, the origin of the

person’s mother was used. If a single group could not be

provided for the person’s mother, the first origin reported

by the person was used.

If any household member failed to respond to the

Spanish/ Hispanic origin question, a response was assigned

by the computer according to the reported entries of other

household members by using specific rules of precedence

of household relationship.

Comparability—The 1990 data on Hispanic origin are

generally comparable with those for the 1980 census.

However, there are some differences in the format of the

Hispanic origin question between the two censuses. This

question was asked in the Virgin Islands for the first time in

1980. For 1990, the word ‘‘descent’’ was deleted from the

1980 wording. In addition, the category ‘‘Dominican (Dominican Republic)’’ was added to the responses of ‘‘Puerto

Rican,’’ ‘‘Cuban,’’ and ‘‘Other Spanish/ Hispanic origin.’’

Finally, the 1990 question allowed those who reported as

‘‘Other Spanish/ Hispanic’’ to write in their specific Hispanic origin group.

HOUSEHOLD TYPE AND RELATIONSHIP

Household

A household includes all the persons who occupy a

housing unit. A housing unit is a house, an apartment, a

mobile home, a houseboat, a group of rooms, or a single

room that is occupied (or if vacant, is intended for occupancy) as separate living quarters. Separate living quarters

are those in which the occupants live and eat separately

from any other persons in the building and which have

direct access from the outside of the building or through a

common hall. The occupants may be a single family, one

person living alone, two or more families living together, or

any other group of related or unrelated persons who share

living arrangements. In 100-percent tabulations, the count

of households or householders always equals the count of

occupied housing units.

Persons Per Household—A measure obtained by dividing the number of persons in households by the number of

households (or householders). In cases where persons in

households are cross-classified by race or Hispanic origin,

B–10 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 11 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

persons in the household are classified by the race or

Hispanic origin of the householder rather than the race or

Hispanic origin of each individual.

Relationship to Householder

Householder—The data on relationship to householder

were derived from answers to questionnaire item 2, which

was asked of all persons in housing units. One person in

each household is designated as the householder. In most

cases, this is the person, or one of the persons, in whose

name the home is owned, being bought, or rented and who

is listed in column 1 of the census questionnaire. If there is

no such person in the household, any adult household

member 15 years old and over could be designated as the

householder.

Households are classified by type according to the sex

of the householder and the presence of relatives. Two

types of householders are distinguished: a family householder and a nonfamily householder. A family householder

is a householder living with one or more persons related to

him or her by birth, marriage, or adoption. The householder

and all persons in the household related to him or her are

family members. A nonfamily householder is a householder living alone or with nonrelatives only.

Spouse—Includes a person married to and living with a

householder. This category includes persons in formal

marriages, as well as persons classified as ‘‘consensually

married.’’ The number of spouses is equal to the number of

‘‘married-couple families’’ or ‘‘married-couple households’’

in 100-percent tabulations.

Child—Includes a son or daughter by birth, a stepchild, or

adopted child of the householder, regardless of the child’s

age or marital status. The category excludes sons-in-law,

daughters-in-law, and foster children.

Natural-Born or Adopted Son/ Daughter—A son or daughter of the householder by birth, regardless of the age of

the child. Also, this category includes sons or daughters

of the householder by legal adoption, regardless of the

age of the child. If the stepson/ stepdaughter of the

householder has been legally adopted by the householder, the child is still classified as a stepchild.

Stepson/ Stepdaughter—A son or daughter of the householder through marriage but not by birth, regardless of

the age of the child. If the stepson/ stepdaughter of the

householder has been legally adopted by the householder, the child is still classified as a stepchild.

Own Child—A never-married child under 18 years who

is a son or daughter by birth, a stepchild, or an adopted

child of the householder. In certain tabulations, own

children are further classified as living with two parents

or with one parent only. Own children of the householder living with two parents are by definition found

only in married-couple families.

In a subfamily, an ‘‘own child’’ is a never-married

child under 18 years of age who is a son, daughter,

stepchild, or an adopted child of a mother in a motherchild subfamily, a father in a father-child subfamily, or

either spouse in a married-couple subfamily.

‘‘Related children’’ in a family include own children and

all other persons under 18 years of age in the household,

regardless of marital status, who are related to the householder, except the spouse of the householder. Foster

children are not included since they are not related to the

householder.

Other Relatives—In tabulations, includes any household

member related to the householder by birth, marriage, or

adoption, but not included specifically in another relationship category. In certain detailed tabulations, the following

categories may be shown:

Grandchild—The grandson or granddaughter of the

householder.

Brother/ Sister—The brother or sister of the householder, including stepbrothers, stepsisters, and brothers

and sisters by adoption. Brothers-in-law and sisters-inlaw are included in the ‘‘Other relative’’ category on the

questionnaire.

Parent—The father or mother of the householder, including a stepparent or adoptive parent. Fathers-in-law and

mothers-in-law are included in the ‘‘Other relative’’

category on the questionnaire.

Other Relatives—Anyone not listed in a reported category above who is related to the householder by birth,

marriage, or adoption (brother-in-law, grandparent, nephew,

aunt, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, cousin, and so

forth).

Nonrelatives—Includes any household member, including

foster children not related to the householder by birth,

marriage, or adoption. The following categories may be

presented in more detailed tabulations:

Roomer, Boarder, or Foster Child—Roomer, boarder,

lodger, and foster children or foster adults of the

householder.

Housemate or Roommate—A person who is not related

to the householder and who shares living quarters

primarily in order to share expenses.

Unmarried Partner—A person who is not related to the

householder, who shares living quarters, and who has a

close personal relationship with the householder. persons in the household are classified by the race or

Hispanic origin of the householder rather than the race

or Hispanic origin of each individual.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–11
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 12 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Other Nonrelatives—A person who is not related by

birth, marriage, or adoption to the householder and who

is not described by the categories given above.

When relationship is not reported for an individual, it is

imputed according to the responses for age, sex, and

marital status for that person while maintaining consistency with responses for other individuals in the household. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix

C, Accuracy of the Data.)

Unrelated Individual

An unrelated individual is: (1) a householder living alone

or with nonrelatives only, (2) a household member who is

not related to the householder, or (3) a person living in

group quarters who is not an inmate of an institution.

Family Type

A family consists of a householder and one or more

other persons living in the same household who are

related to the householder by birth, marriage, or adoption.

All persons in a household who are related to the householder are regarded as members of his or her family. A

household can contain only one family for purposes of

census tabulations. Not all households contain families

since a household may comprise a group of unrelated

persons or one person living alone.

Families are classified by type as either a ‘‘marriedcouple family’’ or ‘‘other family’’ according to the sex of the

householder and the presence of relatives. The data on

family type are based on answers to questions on sex and

relationship which were asked on a 100-percent basis.

Married-Couple Family—A family in which the householder and his or her spouse are enumerated as members of the same household.

Other Family:

Male Householder, No Wife Present—A family with a

male householder and no spouse of householder present.

Female Householder, No Husband Present—A family

with a female householder and no spouse of householder present.

Persons Per Family—A measure obtained by dividing the

number of persons in families by the total number of

families (or family householders). In cases where the

measure, ‘‘persons in family’’ or ‘‘persons per family’’ are

cross-tabulated by race or Hispanic origin, the race or

Hispanic origin refers to the householder rather than the

race or Hispanic origin of each individual.

Subfamily

A subfamily is a married couple (husband and wife

enumerated as members of the same household) with or

without never-married children under 18 years old, or one

parent with one or more never-married children under 18

years old, living in a household and related to, but not

including, either the householder or the householder’s

spouse. The number of subfamilies is not included in the

count of families, since subfamily members are counted as

part of the householder’s family.

Subfamilies are defined during processing of sample

data. In selected tabulations, subfamilies are further classified by type: married-couple subfamilies, with or without

own children; mother-child subfamilies; and father-child

subfamilies.

Lone parents include people maintaining either oneparent families or one-parent subfamilies. Married couples

include husbands and wives in both married-couple families and married-couple subfamilies.

Unmarried-Partner Household

An unmarried-partner household is a household other

than a ‘‘married-couple household’’ that includes a householder and an ‘‘unmarried partner.’’ An ‘‘unmarried partner’’ can be of the same sex or of the opposite sex of the

householder. An ‘‘unmarried partner’’ in an ‘‘unmarried

partner household’’ is an adult who is unrelated to the

householder, but shares living quarters and has a close

personal relationship with the householder.

Unmarried-Couple Household

An unmarried-couple household is composed of two

unrelated adults of the opposite sex (one of whom is the

householder) who share a housing unit with or without the

presence of children under 15 years old.

Foster Children

Foster children are nonrelatives of the householder and

are included in the category, ‘‘Roomer, boarder, or foster

child’’ on the questionnaire. Foster children are identified

as persons under 18 years old and living in households

that have no nonrelatives 18 years old and over (who might

be parents of the nonrelatives under 18).

Stepfamily

A stepfamily is a ‘‘married-couple family’’ with at least

one stepchild of the householder present, where the

householder is the husband.

Comparability—The 1990 definition of a household is the

same as that used in 1980. The 1980 relationship category

‘‘Son/ daughter’’ has been replaced by two categories,

‘‘Natural-born or adopted son/ daughter’’ and ‘‘Stepson/

B–12 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 13 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

stepdaughter.’’ ‘‘Grandchild’’ has been added as a separate category. The 1980 nonrelative categories: ‘‘Roomer,

boarder’’ and ‘‘Roommate’’ have been replaced by the

categories ‘‘Roomer, boarder, or foster child,’’ ‘‘Housemate, roommate,’’ and ‘‘Unmarried partner.’’ The 1980

nonrelative category ‘‘Paid employee’’ has been dropped.

INCOME IN 1989

The data on income in 1989 were derived from answers

to questionnaire items 32 and 33. Information on money

income received in the calendar year 1989 was requested

from persons 15 years old and over. ‘‘Total income’’ is the

algebraic sum of the amounts reported separately for

wage or salary income; net nonfarm self-employment

income; net farm self-employment income; interest, dividend, or net rental or royalty income; Social Security or

railroad retirement income; public assistance or welfare

income; retirement or disability income; and all other

income. ‘‘Earnings’’ is defined as the algebraic sum of

wage or salary income and net income from farm and

nonfarm self-employment. ‘‘Earnings’’ represent the amount

of income received regularly before deductions for personal income taxes, Social Security, bond purchases,

union dues, medicare deductions, etc.

Receipts from the following sources are not included as

income: money received from the sale of property (unless

the recipient was engaged in the business of selling such

property); the value of income ‘‘in kind’’ from food stamps,

public housing subsidies, medical care, employer contributions for persons, etc.; withdrawal of bank deposits; money

borrowed; tax refunds; exchange of money between relatives living in the same household; gifts and lump-sum

inheritances, insurance payments, and other types of

lump-sum receipts.

Income Type in 1989

The eight types of income reported in the census are

defined as follows:

1. Wage or Salary Income—Includes total money earnings received for work performed as an employee

during the calendar year 1989. It includes wages,

salary, Armed Forces pay, commissions, tips, piecerate payments, and cash bonuses earned before

deductions were made for taxes, bonds, pensions,

union dues, etc.

2. Nonfarm Self-Employment Income—Includes net money

income (gross receipts minus expenses) from one’s

own business, professional enterprise, or partnership.

Gross receipts include the value of all goods sold and

services rendered. Expenses includes costs of goods

purchased, rent, heat, light, power, depreciation charges,

wages and salaries paid, business taxes (not personal

income taxes), etc.

3. Farm Self-Employment Income—Includes net money

income (gross receipts minus operating expenses)

from the operation of a farm by a person on his or her

own account, as an owner, renter, or sharecropper.

Gross receipts include the value of all products sold,

government farm programs, money received from the

rental of farm equipment to others, and incidental

receipts from the sale of wood, sand, gravel, etc.

Operating expenses include cost of feed, fertilizer,

seed, and other farming supplies, cash wages paid to

farmhands, depreciation charges, cash rent, interest

on farm mortgages, farm building repairs, farm taxes

(not local and Federal personal income taxes), etc.

The value of fuel, food, or other farm products used for

family living is not included as part of net income.

4. Interest, Dividend, or Net Rental Income—Includes

interest on savings or bonds, dividends from stockholdings or membership in associations, net income

from rental of property to others and receipts from

boarders or lodgers, net royalties, and periodic payments from an estate or trust fund.

5. Social Security Income—Includes Social Security pensions and survivors benefits and permanent disability

insurance payments made by the Social Security

Administration prior to deductions for medical insurance, and railroad retirement insurance checks from

the U.S. Government. Medicare reimbursements are

not included.

6. Public Assistance Income—Includes: (1) supplementary security income payments made by Federal or

local welfare agencies to low income persons who are

aged (65 years old or over), blind, or disabled; (2) aid

to families with dependent children, and (3) general

assistance. Separate payments received for hospital

or other medical care (vendor payments) are excluded

from this item.

7. Retirement or Disability Income—Includes: (1) retirement pensions and survivor benefits from a former

employer, labor union, or Federal, local, or other

governmental agency; (2) disability income from sources

such as worker’s compensation; companies or unions;

Federal or local government; and the U.S. military; (3)

periodic receipts from annuities and insurance; and (4)

regular income from IRA and KEOGH plans.

8. All Other Income—Includes unemployment compensation, Veterans Administration (VA) payments, alimony and child support, contributions received periodically from persons not living in the household, military

family allotments, net gambling winnings, and other

kinds of periodic income other than earnings.

Income of Households—Includes the income of the

householder and all other persons 15 years old and over in

the household, whether related to the householder or not.

Because many households consist of only one person,

average household income is usually less than average

family income.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–13
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 14 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Income of Families and Persons—In compiling statistics

on family income, the incomes of all members 15 years old

and over in each family are summed and treated as a

single amount. However, for persons 15 years old and

over, the total amounts of their own incomes are used.

Although the income statistics covered the calendar year

1989, the characteristics of persons and the composition

of families refer to the time of enumeration (April 1990).

Thus, the income of the family does not include amounts

received by persons who were members of the family

during all or part of the calendar year 1989 if these persons

no longer resided with the family at the time of enumeration. Yet, family income amounts reported by related

persons who did not reside with the family during 1989 but

who were members of the family at the time of enumeration are included. However, the composition of most

families was the same during 1989 as in April 1990.

Median Income—The median divides the income distribution into two equal parts, one having incomes above the

median and the other having incomes below the median.

For households and families, the median income is based

on the distribution of the total number of units including

those with no income. The median for persons is based on

persons with income. The median income values for all

households, families, and persons are computed on the

basis of more detailed income intervals than shown in

most tabulations. Median household or family income

figures of $30,000 or less are calculated using linear

interpolation. For persons, corresponding median values

of $25,000 or less are also computed using linear interpolation. All other median income amounts are derived

through Pareto interpolation. (For more information on

medians and interpolation, see the discussion under ‘‘Derived

Measures.’’)

Mean Income—This is the amount obtained by dividing

the total income of a particular statistical universe by the

number of units in that universe. Thus, mean household

income is obtained by dividing total household income by

the total number of households. For the various types of

income the means are based on households having those

types of income. ‘‘Per capita income’’ is the mean income

computed for every man, woman, and child in a particular

group. It is derived by dividing the total income of a

particular group by the total population in that group.

Care should be exercised in using and interpreting mean

income values for small subgroups of the population.

Because the mean is influenced strongly by extreme

values in the distribution, it is especially susceptible to the

effects of sampling variability, misreporting, and processing errors. The median, which is not affected by extreme

values, is, therefore, a better measure than the mean when

the population base is small. The mean, nevertheless, is

shown in some data products for most small subgroups

because, when weighted according to the number of

cases, the means can be added to obtained summary

measures for areas and groups other than those shown in

census tabulations.

Limitation of the Data—Since questionnaire entries for

income frequently are based on memory and not on

records, many persons tended to forget minor or irregular

sources of income and, therefore, underreport their income.

Underreporting tends to be more pronounced for income

sources that are not derived from earnings, such as Social

Security, public assistance, or from interest, dividends, and

net rental income.

There are errors of reporting due to the misunderstanding of the income questions such as reporting gross rather

than net dollar amounts for the two questions on net

self-employment income, which resulted in an overstatement of these items. Another common error is the reporting of identical dollar amounts in two of the eight type of

income items where a respondent with only one source of

income assumed that the second amount should be

entered to represent total income. Such instances of

overreporting had an impact on the level of mean nonfarm

or farm self-employment income and mean total income

published for the various geographical subdivisions of the

State.

Extensive computer editing procedures were instituted

in the data processing operation to reduce some of these

reporting errors and to improve the accuracy of the income

data. These procedures corrected various reporting deficiencies and improved the consistency of reported income

items associated with work experience and information on

occupation and class of worker. For example, if persons

reported they were self-employed on their own farm, not

incorporated, but had reported wage and salary earnings

only, the latter amount was shifted to net farm selfemployment income. Also, if any respondent reported total

income only, the amount was generally assigned to one of

the type of income items according to responses to the

work experience and class-of-worker questions. Another

type of problem involved nonreporting of income data.

Where income information was not reported, procedures

were devised to impute appropriate values with either no

income or positive or negative dollar amounts for the

missing entries. (For more information on imputation, see

Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.)

In income tabulations for households and families, the

lowest income group (e.g., less than $1,000) includes units

that were classified as having no 1989 income. Many of

these were living on income ‘‘in kind,’’ savings, or gifts,

were newly created families, or families in which the sole

breadwinner had recently died or left the household.

However, many of the households and families who reported

no income probably had some money income which was

not recorded in the census.

The income data presented in the tabulations covers

money income only. The fact that many farm families

receive an important part of their income in the form of

‘‘free’’ housing and goods produced and consumed on the

farm rather than in money should be taken into consideration in comparing the income of farm and nonfarm

residents. Nonmoney income such as business expense

accounts, use of business transportation and facilities, or

B–14 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 15 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

partial compensation by business for medical and educational expenses was also received by some nonfarm

residents. Many low income families also receive income

‘‘in kind’’ from public welfare programs. In comparing

income data for 1989 with earlier years, it should be noted

that an increase or decrease in money income does not

necessarily represent a comparable change in real income,

unless adjustments for changes in prices are made.

Comparability—The income data collected in the 1980

and 1970 censuses are similar to the 1990 census data,

but there are variations in the detail of the questions. Each

person was required to report:

• Wage or salary income

• Net nonfarm self-employment income

• Net farm self-employment income

• Interest, dividend, or net rental or royalty income

• Social Security income

• Public assistance income

• Income from all other sources

Between the 1980 and 1990 censuses, there were

minor differences in the processing of the data. In both

censuses, all persons with missing values in one or more

of the detailed type of income items and total income were

designated as allocated. Each missing entry was imputed

either as a ‘‘no’’ or as a dollar amount. If total income was

reported and one or more of the type of income fields was

not answered, then the entry in total income generally was

assigned to one of the income types according to the

socioeconomic characteristics of the income recipient.

This person was designated as unallocated.

In 1980 and 1990, all nonrespondents with income not

reported (whether heads of households or other persons)

were assigned the reported income of persons with similar

characteristics. (For more information on imputation, see

Appendix C, ‘‘Accuracy of the Data.’’)

There was a difference in the method of computer

derivation of aggregate income from individual amounts

between the two census processing operations. In the

1980 census, income amounts less than $100,000 were

coded in tens of dollars, and amounts of $100,000 or more

were coded in thousands of dollars; $5 was added to each

amount coded in tens of dollars and $500 to each amount

coded in thousands of dollars. Entries of $999,000 or more

were treated as $999,500 and losses of $9,999 or more

were treated as minus $9,999. In the 1990 census, income

amounts less than $999,999 were keyed in dollars. Amounts

of $999,999 or more were treated as $999,999 and losses

of $9,999 or more were treated as minus $9,999 in all of

the computer derivations of aggregate income.

In 1970, each person 14 years and over was required to

report:

• Wage or salary income

• Net nonfarm self-employment income

• Net farm self-employment income

• Social Security or Railroad Retirement

• Public assistance or welfare payments

• Income from all other sources

If a person reported a dollar amount in wage or salary,

net nonfarm self-employment income, or net farm selfemployment income, the person was considered as unallocated only if no further dollar amounts were imputed for

any additional missing entries.

In 1960, all persons 14 years and over were required to

report wage or salary income, net self-employment income,

and income other than earnings received in 1959. An

assumption was made in the editing process that no other

type of income was received by a person who reported the

receipt of either wage and salary income or self-employment

but who had failed to report the receipt of other money

income.

For several reasons, the income data shown in census

tabulations are not directly comparable with those that

may be obtained from statistical summaries of income tax

returns. Income, as defined for Federal tax purposes,

differs somewhat from the Census Bureau concept. Moreover, the coverage of income tax statistics is different

because of the exemptions of persons having small amounts

of income and the inclusion of net capital gains in tax

returns. Furthermore, members of some families file separate returns and others file joint returns; consequently,

the income reporting unit is not consistently either a family

or a person.

The earnings data shown in census tabulations are not

directly comparable with earnings records of the Social

Security Administration. The earnings record data for 1989

excluded the earnings of most civilian government employees, some employees of nonprofit organizations, workers

covered by the Railroad Retirement Act, and persons not

covered by the program because of insufficient earnings.

Furthermore, earnings received from any one employer in

excess of $48,000 in 1989 are not covered by earnings

records. Finally, because census data are obtained from

household questionnaires, they may differ from Social

Security Administration earnings record data, which are

based upon employers’ reports and the Federal income

tax returns of self-employed persons.

INDUSTRY, OCCUPATION, AND CLASS OF

WORKER

The data on industry, occupation, and class of worker

were derived from answers to questionnaire items 28, 29,

and 30 respectively. These questions were asked of all

persons. Information on industry relates to the kind of

business conducted by a person’s employing organization;

occupation describes the kind of work the person does on

the job.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–15
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 16 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

For employed persons, the data refer to the person’s

job during the reference week. For those who worked at

two or more jobs, the data refer to the job at which the

person worked the greatest number of hours. For unemployed persons, the data refer to their last job. The industry

and occupation statistics are derived from the detailed

classification systems developed for the 1990 census as

described below. The Classified Index of Industries and

Occupations provided additional information on the industry and occupation classification systems.

Respondents provided the data for the tabulations by

writing on the questionnaires descriptions of their industry

and occupation.

All cases were coded by a clerical staff in the Census

Bureau’s Jacksonville, FL processing office. The clerical

staff converted the written questionnaire descriptions to

codes by comparing these descriptions to entries in the

Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations. For the

industry code, these coders also referred to an Employer

Name List (formerly called Company Name List). This list

contained the names of business establishments and their

Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes converted to

population census equivalents. This list facilitated coding

and maintained industrial classification comparability.

Industry

The industry classification system developed for the

1990 census consists of 236 categories for employed

persons, classified into 13 major industry groups. Since

1940, the industrial classification has been based on the

Standard Industrial Classification Manual (SIC). The 1990

census classification was developed from the 1987 SIC

published by the Office of Management and Budget,

Executive Office of the President.

The SIC was designed primarily to classify establishments by the type of industrial activity in which they were

engaged. However, census data, which were collected

from households, differ in detail and nature from those

obtained from establishment surveys. Therefore, the census classification systems, while defined in SIC terms,

cannot reflect the full detail in all categories. There are

several levels of industrial classification found in census

products. For example, the 1990 CP-2, Social and Economic Characteristics report includes 41 unique industrial

categories, while the 1990 Summary Tape File 4 (STF 4)

presents 72 categories.

Occupation

The occupational classification system developed for

the 1990 census consists of 501 specific occupational

categories for employed persons arranged into 6 summary

and 13 major occupational groups. This classification was

developed to be consistent with the Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) Manual: 1980, published by the

Office of Federal Statistical Policy and Standards, U.S.

Department of Commerce. Tabulations with occupation as

the primary characteristic present several levels of occupational detail. The most detailed tabulations are shown in

special 1990 tape files on occupation. This product contains all 501 occupational categories.

Some occupation groups are related closely to certain

industries. Operators of transportation equipment, farm

operators and workers, and private household workers

account for major portions of their respective industries of

transportation, agriculture, and private households. However, the industry categories include persons in other

occupations. For example, persons employed in agriculture include truck drivers and bookkeepers; persons employed

in the transportation industry include mechanics, freight

handlers, and payroll clerks; and persons employed in the

private household industry include occupations such as

chauffeur, gardener, and secretary.

Class of Worker

The data on class of worker were derived from answers

to questionnaire item 30. The information on class of

worker refers to the same job as a respondent’s industry

and occupation and categorizes persons according to the

type of ownership of the employing organization. The class

of worker categories are defined as follows:

Private Wage and Salary Workers—Includes persons

who worked for wages, salary, commission, tips, pay-inkind, or piece rates for a private for profit employer or a

private not-for-profit, tax-exempt or charitable organization. Self-employed persons whose business was incorporated are included with private wage and salary workers

because they are paid employees of their own companies.

Some tabulations present data separately for these subcategories: ‘‘For profit,’’ ‘‘Not for profit,’’ and ‘‘Own business incorporated.’’

Government Workers—Includes persons who were employees of any local, or Federal governmental unit, regardless

of the activity of the particular agency. For some tabulations, the data were presented separately for the two

levels of government.

Self-Employed Workers—Includes persons who worked

for profit or fees in their own unincorporated business,

profession, or trade, or who operated a farm.

Unpaid Family Workers—Includes persons who worked

15 hours or more without pay in a business or on a farm

operated by a relative.

Salaried/ Self-Employed—In tabulations that categorize

persons as either salaried or self-employed, the salaried

category includes private and government wage and salary

workers; self-employed includes self-employed persons

and unpaid family workers.

The industry category, ‘‘Public administration,’’ is limited

to regular government functions such as legislative, judicial, administrative, and regulatory activities of governments. Other government organizations such as schools,

hospitals, liquor stores, and bus lines are classified by

B–16 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 17 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

industry according to the activity in which they are engaged.

On the other hand, the class of worker government

categories include all government workers.

Occasionally respondents supplied industry, occupation, or class of worker descriptions which were not

sufficiently specific for precise classification or did not

report on these items at all. Some of these cases were

corrected through the field editing process and during the

coding and tabulation operations. In the coding operation,

certain types of incomplete entries were corrected using

the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations. For

example, it was possible in certain situations to assign an

industry code based on the occupation reported.

Following the coding operations, there was a computer

edit and an allocation process. The edit first determined

whether a respondent was in the universe which required

an industry and occupation code. The codes for the three

items (industry, occupation, and class of worker) were

checked to ensure they were valid and were edited for their

relation to each other. Invalid and inconsistent codes were

either blanked or changed to a consistent code.

If one or more of the three codes were blank after the

edit, a code was assigned from a ‘‘similar’’ person based

on other items such as age, sex, education, farm or

nonfarm residence, and weeks worked. If all the labor

force and income data also were blank, all these economic

items were assigned from one other person who provided

all the necessary data.

Comparability—Comparability of industry and occupation

data was affected by a number of factors, primarily the

systems used to classify the questionnaire responses. For

both the industry and occupation classification systems,

the basic structures were generally the same from 1940 to

1970, but changes in the individual categories limited

comparability of the data from one census to another.

These changes were needed to recognize the ‘‘birth’’ of

new industries and occupations, the ‘‘death’’ of others,

and the growth and decline in existing industries and

occupations, as well as, the desire of analysts and other

users for more detail in the presentation of the data.

Probably the greatest cause of incomparability is the

movement of a segment of a category to a different

category in the next census. Changes in the nature of jobs

and respondent terminology, and refinement of category

composition made these movements necessary.

In the 1990 census, the industry classification had minor

revisions to reflect recent changes to the SIC. The 1990

occupational classification system is essentially the same

as that for the 1980 census. However, the conversion of

the census classification to the SOC in 1980 meant that

the 1990 classification system was less comparable to the

classifications used prior to the 1980 census.

Other factors that affected data comparability included

the universe to which the data referred (in 1970, the age

cutoff for labor force was changed from 14 years to 16

years); how the industry and occupation questions were

worded on the questionnaire (for example, important changes

were made in 1970); improvements in the coding procedures (the Employer Name List technique was introduced

in 1960); and how the ‘‘not reported’’ cases are handled.

Prior to 1970, they were placed in the residual categories,

‘‘Industry not reported’’ and ‘‘Occupation not reported.’’ In

1970, an allocation process was introduced that assigned

these cases to major groups. In 1990, as in 1980, the ‘‘Not

reported’’ cases were assigned to individual categories.

Therefore, the 1980 and 1990 data for individual categories included some numbers of persons who were tabulated in a ‘‘Not reported’’ category in previous censuses.

The following publications contain information on the

various factors affecting comparability and are particularly

useful for understanding differences in the occupation and

industry information from earlier censuses: U.S. Bureau of

the Census, Changes Between the 1950 and 1960 Occupation and Industry Classifications With Detailed Adjustments of 1950 Data to the 1960 Classifications, Technical

Paper No. 18, 1968; U.S. Bureau of the Census, 1970

Occupation and Industry Classification Systems in Terms

of their 1960 Occupation and Industry Elements, Technical

Paper No. 26, 1972; and U.S. Bureau of the Census, The

Relationship Between the 1970 and 1980 Industry and

Occupation Classification Systems, Technical Paper No.

59, 1988. For citations for earlier census years, see the

1980 Census of Population report, PC80-1-D, Detailed

Population Characteristics.

The 1990 census introduced an additional class of

worker category for ‘‘private not-for-profit’’ employers. This

category is a subset of the 1980 category ‘‘employee of

private employer’’ so there is no comparable data before

1990. Also in 1990, employees of foreign governments,

the United Nations, etc., are classified as ‘‘private not-forprofit,’’ rather than Federal Government as in 1970 and

1980. While in theory, there was a change in comparability,

in practice, the small number of U.S. residents working for

foreign governments made this change negligible.

Comparability between the statistics on industry and

occupation from the 1990 census and statistics from other

sources is affected by many of the factors described in the

section on ‘‘Employment Status.’’ These factors are primarily geographic differences between residence and place

of work, different dates of reference, and differences in

counts because of dual job holding. Industry data from

population censuses cover all industries and all kinds of

workers, whereas, data from establishments often excluded

private household workers, government workers, and the

self-employed. Also, the replies from household respondents may have differed in detail and nature from those

obtained from establishments.

Occupation data from the census and data from government licensing agencies, professional associations, trade

unions, etc., may not be as comparable as expected.

Organizational listings often include persons not in the

labor force or persons devoting all or most of their time to

another occupation; or the same person may be included

in two or more different listings. In addition, relatively few

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–17
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 18 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

organizations, except for those requiring licensing, attained

complete coverage of membership in a particular occupational field.

JOURNEY TO WORK

Place of Work

The data on place of work were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 22, which was asked of persons who

indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time

during the reference week. (For more information, see

discussion under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

Data were tabulated for workers 16 years and over; that

is, members of the Armed Forces and civilians who were at

work during the reference week. Data on place of work

refer to the geographic location at which workers carried

out their occupational activities during the reference week.

The exact address (number and street) of the place of

work was asked, as well as the place (town or area); the

island, if in the U.S. Virgin Islands; or State, if in the U.S. If

the person’s employer operated in more than one location,

the exact address of the location or branch where the

respondent worked was requested. When the number and

street name were unknown, a description of the location,

such as the building name or nearest street or intersection,

was to be entered.

Persons who worked at more than one location during

the reference week were asked to report the one at which

they worked the greatest number of hours. Persons who

regularly worked in several locations each day during the

reference week were requested to give the address at

which they began work each day. For cases in which daily

work did not begin at a central place each day, the person

was asked to provide as much information as possible to

describe the area in which he or she worked most during

the reference week.

In some tabulations, place-of-work locations may be

defined as ‘‘in area of residence’’ and ‘‘outside area of

residence.’’ The area of residence may vary from table to

table or even within a table, and refers to the particular

area or areas shown. For example, in a table that provides

data for islands, ‘‘in area of residence’’ refers to persons

who worked on the same island on which they lived, while

‘‘outside area of residence’’ refers to persons whose

workplace was located someplace other than on the island

on which they lived. Similarly, in a table that provides data

for several types of areas, such as the U.S. Virgin Islands

and its individual islands, and places, the place-of-work

data will be variable and is determined by the geographic

level (island, census subdistrict, or place) shown in each

section of the tabulation. In selected areas, census designated places (CDP’s) may appear in the tabulations as

places of work. The accuracy of place-of-work data for

CDP’s may be affected by the extent to which their census

names were familiar to respondents, and by coding problems caused by similarities between the CDP name and

the names of other geographic jurisdictions in the same

vicinity.

Place-of-work data may be shown for island subdivisions called ‘‘census subdistricts’’ based on the responses

to the place-of-work question. When a respondent reported

a locality or incorporated place that formed a part of a

census subdistrict, the coding and tabulating procedure

was designed to include the response in the total for the

census subdistrict. The accuracy of the data for some

census subdistricts may be affected by coding problems

that resulted from the unfamiliarity of the respondent with

the census subdistrict in which the workplace was located

or when a census subdistrict and a place of the same or

similar name are located close together.

Place-of-work data may show a few workers who made

unlikely daily work trips (e.g., workers who lived on St.

Thomas and worked in Puerto Rico). This result is attributable to persons who worked during the reference week

at a location that was different from their usual place of

work, such as persons away from home on business.

Comparability— Since items on commuting characteristics were asked for the first time in the 1990 census, no

comparable data exist.

Limitation of the Data—The data on place of work relate

to a reference week; that is, the calendar week preceding

the date on which the respondents were interviewed by

enumerators. This week is not the same for all respondents because the enumeration was not completed in 1

week. However, for the majority of persons, the reference

week for the 1990 census is the last week in March 1990.

The lack of a uniform reference week means that the

place-of-work data reported in the census will not exactly

match the distribution of workplace locations observed or

measured during an actual workweek.The place-of-work

data are estimates of persons 16 years old and over who

were both employed and at work during the reference

week (including persons in the Armed Forces). Persons

who did not work during the reference week but had jobs

or businesses from which they were temporarily absent

due to illness, bad weather, industrial dispute, vacation, or

other personal reasons are not included in the place-ofwork data. Therefore, the data on place of work understate

the total number of jobs or total employment in a geographic area during the reference week. It also should be

noted that persons who had irregular, casual, or unstructured jobs during the reference week may have erroneously reported themselves as not working.

The address where the individual worked most often

during the reference week was recorded on the census

questionnaire. If a worker held two jobs, only data about

the primary job (the one worked the greatest number of

hours during the preceding week) was requested. Persons

who regularly worked in several locations during the reference week were requested to give the address at which

they began work each day. For cases in which daily work

was not begun at a central place each day, the person was

B–18 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 19 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

asked to provide as much information as possible to

describe the area in which he or she worked most during

the reference week.

Means of Transportation to Work

The data on means of transportation to work were

derived from answers to questionnaire item 23a, which

was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that

they worked at some time during the reference week. (For

more information, see discussion under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

Means of transportation to work refers to the principal

mode of travel or type of conveyance that the person

usually used to get from home to work during the reference

week.

Persons who used different means of transportation on

different days of the week were asked to specify the one

they used most often, that is, the greatest number of days.

Persons who used more than one means of transportation

to get to work each day were asked to report the one used

for the longest distance during the work trip. The category,

‘‘Car, truck, or van,’’ includes workers using a car (including company cars but excluding taxicabs), a truck of

one-ton capacity or less, or a van. The category, ‘‘Public

transportation,’’ includes workers who used a bus, safari

bus, taxi bus, ferryboat, water taxi, or taxicab even if each

mode is not shown separately in the tabulation. The

category, ‘‘Other means,’’ includes workers who used a

mode of travel which is not identified separately within the

data distribution. The category, ‘‘Other means,’’ may vary

from table to table, depending on the amount of detail

shown in a particular distribution.

The means of transportation data for some areas may

show workers using modes of public transportation that

are not available in those areas (e.g., ferryboat or water

taxi, in an area where there actually is no ferryboat or water

taxi service). This result is largely due to persons who

worked during the reference week at a location that was

different from their usual place of work (such as persons

away from home on business in an area where such

service was available) and persons who used more than

one means of transportation each day but whose principal

means was unavailable where they lived.

Private Vehicle Occupancy

The data on private vehicle occupancy were derived

from answers to questionnaire item 23b. This question was

asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they

worked at some time during the reference week and who

reported in question 23a that their means of transportation

to work was ‘‘Car, truck, or van.’’ (For more information,

see discussion under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

Private vehicle occupancy refers to the number of

persons who usually rode to work in the vehicle during the

reference week. The category, ‘‘Drove alone,’’ includes

persons who usually drove alone to work as well as

persons who were driven to work by someone who then

drove back home or to a nonwork destination. The category, ‘‘Carpooled,’’ includes workers who reported that two

or more persons usually rode to work in the vehicle during

the reference week.

Persons Per Car, Truck, or Van—This is obtained by

dividing the number of persons who reported using a car,

truck, or van to get to work by the number of such vehicles

that they used. The number of vehicles used is derived by

counting each person who drove alone as one vehicle,

each person who reported being in a two-person carpool

as one-half vehicle, each person who reported being in a

three-person carpool as one-third vehicle, and so on, and

then summing all the vehicles.

Time Leaving Home to Go to Work

The data on time leaving home to go to work were

derived from answers to questionnaire item 24a. This

question was asked of persons who indicated in question

21 that they worked at some time during the reference

week and who reported in question 23a that they worked

outside their home. The departure time refers to the time of

day that the person usually left home to go to work during

the reference week. (For more information, see discussion

under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

Travel Time to Work

The data on travel time to work were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 24b. This question was

asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they

worked at some time during the reference week and who

reported in question 23a that they worked outside their

home. Travel time to work refers to the total number of

minutes that it usually took the person to get from home to

work during the reference week. The elapsed time includes

time spent waiting for public transportation, picking up

passengers in carpools, and time spent in other activities

related to getting to work. (For more information, see

discussion under ‘‘Reference Week.’’)

LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT HOME AND ABILITY

TO SPEAK ENGLISH

Language Spoken at Home

Data on language spoken at home were derived from

the answers to questionnaire items 15a and 15b, which

were asked of all persons born before April 1, 1985.

Interviewers were instructed to mark ‘‘Yes’’ in question

15a if the person sometimes or always spoke a language

other than English at home and not to mark ‘‘Yes’’ if a

language was spoken only at school or if speaking was

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–19
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 20 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

limited to a few expressions or slang. For question 15b,

respondents were instructed to print the name of the

non-English language spoken at home. If the person spoke

more than one language other than English, the person

was to report the language spoken more often or the

language learned first.

Questions 15a and 15b referred to languages spoken at

home in an effort to measure the current use of languages

other than English. Persons who knew languages other

than English but did not use them at home or who only

used them elsewhere were excluded. Persons who reported

speaking a language other than English at home may also

speak English; however, the questions did not permit

determination of the main or dominant language of persons who spoke both English and another language. (For

more information, see discussion below on ‘‘Ability to

Speak English.’’)

For persons who indicated that they spoke a language

other than English at home in question 15a, but failed to

specify the name of the language in question 15b, the

language was assigned based on the language of other

speakers in the household; on the language of a person of

the same Hispanic origin or detailed race group living in the

same or a nearby area; or on a person of the same

ancestry or place of birth. In all cases where a person was

assigned a non-English language, it was assumed that the

language was spoken at home. Persons for whom the

name of a language other than English was entered in

question 15b, and for whom question 15a was blank were

assumed to speak that language at home.

The write-in responses listed in question 15b (specific

language spoken) were coded into more than 380 detailed

language categories. Coding clerks supplied numeric codes

for the written entries using a 2,000 name reference list.

The write-in responses represented the names people

used for languages they speak. They may not match the

names or categories used by linguists. The sets of categories used are sometimes geographic and sometimes

linguistic. Figure 1 provides an illustration of the content of

the classification schemes used to present language data.

For more information, write to the Chief, Population Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233.

Household Language—In households where one or more

persons (age 5 years old or over) speak a language other

than English, the household language assigned to all

household members is the non-English language spoken

by the first person with a non-English language in the

following order: householder, spouse, parent, sibling, child,

grandchild, other relative, stepchild, unmarried partner,

housemate or roommate, roomer, boarder, or foster child,

or other nonrelative. Thus, persons who speak only English

may have a non-English household language assigned to

them in tabulations of persons by household language.

Figure 1. Classifications of 1990 Census Languages

Spoken at Home With Illustrative Examples

Classification Classification Examples

Spanish Spanish and

Spanish Creole

French French and

French Creole

Other Indo- Dutch

European

Portuguese or

Portuguese Creole

German

Indic Hindi, Bengali,

Gujarathi, Punjabi,

Other IndoEuropean Danish, Norwegian,

Swedish, Italian,

Greek, Russian

Polish, Czech,

Persian

All other Chinese

languages Japanese

Korean

Tagalog

Vietnamese

Other Asian or

Pacific Island

languages Thai, Mon-Khmer,

Chamorro, Hawaiian

All other Arabic, Amharic,

languages Hungarian, Native

North American

languages, Finnish,

Hebrew, languages

of Africa

Ability to Speak English

Persons 5 years old and over who reported that they

spoke a language other than English in question 15a were

also asked in question 15c to indicate their ability to speak

English based on one of the following categories: ‘‘Very

well,’’ ‘‘Well,’’ ‘‘Not well,’’ or ‘‘Not at all.’’

The data on ability to speak English represent the

person’s own perception about his or her own ability or,

because census questionnaires are usually completed by

one household member, the responses may represent the

perception of another household member. The instructions

to interviewers did not include any information on how to

interpret the response categories in question 15c.

Persons who reported that they spoke a language other

than English at home but whose ability to speak English

was not reported, were assigned the English-language

ability of a randomly selected person of the same age,

Hispanic origin, nativity and year of entry, and language

group.

Linguistic Isolation—A household in which no person

age 14 years or over speaks only English and no person

age 14 years or over who speaks a language other than

English speaks English ‘‘Very well’’ is classified as ‘‘linguistically isolated.’’ All the members of a linguistically

B–20 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 21 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

isolated household are tabulated as linguistically isolated,

including members under age 14 years who may speak

only English.

Limitation of the Data—Persons who speak a language

other than English at home may have first learned that

language at school. However, these persons would be

expected to indicate that they speak English ‘‘Very well.’’

Persons who speak a language other than English, but do

not do so at home, should have been reported as not

speaking a language other than English at home.

The extreme detail in which language names were

coded may give a false impression of the linguistic precision of these data. The names used by speakers of a

language to identify it may reflect ethnic, geographic, or

political affiliations and do not necessarily respect linguistic distinctions. The categories shown in the tabulations

were chosen on a number of criteria, such as information

about the number of speakers of each language that might

be expected in the Virgin Islands.

Comparability—These same questions on language were

asked for the first time in the 1980 census. The question on

ability to speak English was asked for the first time in 1980.

In some tabulations from 1980, the categories ‘‘Very well’’

and ‘‘Well’’ were combined. In tabulations showing ability

to speak English, persons who reported that they speak

English ‘‘Very well’’ are presented separately from persons

who reported their ability to speak English as less than

‘‘Very well.’’

MARITAL STATUS

The data on marital status were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 6, which was asked of all persons. The

marital status classification refers to the status at the time

of enumeration. Data on marital status are tabulated only

for persons 15 years old and over.

All persons were asked whether they were ‘‘now married,’’ ‘‘consensually married,’’ ‘‘widowed,’’ ‘‘divorced,’’

‘‘separated,’’ or ‘‘never married.’’ Couples who live together

(unmarried persons, persons consensually married) were

allowed to report the marital status they considered the

most appropriate.

Never Married—Includes all persons who have never

been married, including persons whose only marriage(s)

was annulled.

Ever Married—Includes persons married at the time of

enumeration (including those separated),widowed, or divorced.

Now Married, Except Separated—Includes persons whose

current marriage has not ended through widowhood, divorce,

or separation (regardless of previous marital history). In

certain tabulations, currently married persons are further

classified as ‘‘spouse present’’ or ‘‘spouse absent.’’

Consensually Married—Includes persons living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract

and are classified as ‘‘now married;’’ they are reported

separately as ‘‘consensually married.’’ The category

may also include couples who live together if they

consider this category the most appropriate.

Separated—Includes persons legally separated or otherwise absent from their spouse because of marital discord.

Included are persons who have been deserted or who

have parted because they no longer want to live together

but who have not obtained a divorce.

Widowed—Includes widows and widowers who have not

remarried.

Divorced—Includes persons who are legally divorced and

who have not remarried.

Now Married—All persons whose current marriage has

not ended by widowhood or divorce. This category includes

persons defined above as ‘‘separated.’’

Spouse Present—Married persons whose wife or husband was enumerated as a member of the same

household, including those whose spouse may have

been temporarily absent for such reasons as travel or

hospitalization.

Spouse Absent—Married persons whose wife or husband was not enumerated as a member of the same

household. This category also includes all married persons living in group quarters.

Separated—Defined above.

Spouse Absent, Other—Married persons whose wife or

husband was not enumerated as a member of the same

household, excluding separated. Included is any person

whose spouse was employed and living away from

home or in an institution or absent in the U.S. Armed

Forces.

Differences between the number of currently married

males and the number of currently married females occur

because of reporting differences and because some husbands and wives have their usual residence in different

areas.

When marital status was not reported, it was imputed

according to the relationship to the householder and sex

and age of the person. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.)

Comparability—The 1990 marital status definitions are

the same as those used in 1980 with the exception of the

term ‘‘never married’’ which replaces the term ‘‘single’’ in

tabulations. A general marital status question has been

asked in every census since 1880.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–21
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 22 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

MOBILITY LIMITATION STATUS

The data on mobility limitation status were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 19a, which was asked of all

persons 15 years old and over. Persons were identified as

having a mobility limitation if they had a health condition

that had lasted for 6 or more months and which made it

difficult to go outside the home alone. Examples of outside

activities on the questionnaire included shopping and

visiting the doctor’s office.

The term ‘‘health condition’’ referred to both physical

and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such

as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally, was

not considered a health condition.

Comparability—This was the first time that a question on

mobility limitation was included in the census.

PLACE OF BIRTH

The data on place of birth were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 8, which was asked of all persons. The

place-of-birth question asked respondents to report the

name of the island in the U.S. Virgin Islands or the U.S.

State, commonwealth, territory, or the foreign country

where they were born. Persons born outside the Virgin

Islands or the United States were asked to report their

place of birth according to current international boundaries. Since numerous changes in boundaries of foreign

countries have occurred in the last century, some persons

may have reported their place of birth in terms of boundaries that existed at the time of their birth or emigration, or

in accordance with their own national preference.

Persons not reporting place of birth were assigned the

birthplace of another family member or were allocated the

response of another person with similar characteristics.

Persons allocated as foreign born also were not allocated

a specific country of birth, but were classified as ‘‘Born

abroad, country not specified.’’

Nativity—Information on place of birth and citizenship

were used to classify the population into two major categories: native and foreign born. When information on place

of birth was not reported, nativity was assigned on the

basis of answers to citizenship, if reported, and other

characteristics.

Native—Includes persons born in the U.S. Virgin Islands,

the United States, Puerto Rico, or another outlying area of

the United States. The small number of persons who were

born in a foreign country but have at least one American

parent also are included in this category.

The native population is classified in the following

groups: persons born on the island on which they resided

at the time of the census; persons born on a different

island in the U.S. Virgin Islands; persons born in the United

States; persons born in Puerto Rico or another outlying

area of the U.S.; and persons born abroad with at least one

American parent.

Foreign Born—Includes persons not classified as ‘‘Native.’’

The foreign-born population is shown by selected area,

country, or region of birth; the places of birth shown in the

data products were selected based on the number of

respondents who reported that area or country of birth.

Comparability—Similar data were shown in tabulations

for the 1980 census and other recent censuses. Prior to

the 1990 census, persons not reporting place of birth were

generally classified as native. Earlier censuses did not ask

for the specific State or U.S. territory of birth.

The questionnaire instruction to report mother’s usual

place of residence instead of the location of the hospital (if

born in a hospital) was dropped in 1990. Evaluation studies

of 1970 and 1980 U.S. census data demonstrated that this

instruction was generally ignored or misunderstood. Although

the hospital and the mother’s residence is the same island

or U.S. State for most births, this change may have a slight

effect on island of birth and on State of birth in the United

States for States with large metropolitan areas that straddle State boundaries.

POVERTY STATUS IN 1989

The data on poverty status were derived from answers

to the same questions as the income data, questionnaire

items 32 and 33. (For more information, see the discussion

under ‘‘Income in 1989.’’) Poverty statistics presented in

census publications were based on a definition originated

by the Social Security Administration in 1964 and subsequently modified by Federal interagency committees in

1969 and 1980 and prescribed by the Office of Management and Budget in Directive 14 as the standard to be

used by Federal agencies for statistical purposes.

At the core of this definition was the 1961 economy food

plan, the least costly of four nutritionally adequate food

plans designed by the Department of Agriculture. It was

determined from the Agriculture Department’s 1955 survey

of food consumption that families of three or more persons

spend approximately one-third of their income on food;

hence, the poverty level for these families was set at three

times the cost of the economy food plan. For smaller

families and persons living alone, the cost of the economy

food plan was multiplied by factors that were slightly higher

to compensate for the relatively larger fixed expenses for

these smaller households.

The income cutoffs used by the Census Bureau to

determine the poverty status of families and unrelated

individuals included a set of 48 thresholds arranged in a

two-dimensional matrix consisting of family size (from one

person to nine or more persons) cross-classified by presence and number of family members under 18 years old

(from no children present to eight or more children present).

B–22 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 23 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Unrelated individuals and two-person families were further

differentiated by age of the householder (under 65 years

old and 65 years old and over).

The total income of each family or unrelated individual in

the sample was tested against the appropriate poverty

threshold to determine the poverty status of that family or

unrelated individual. If the total income was less than the

corresponding cutoff, the family or unrelated individual was

classified as ‘‘below the poverty level.’’ The number of

persons below the poverty level was the sum of the

number of persons in families with incomes below the

poverty level and the number of unrelated individuals with

incomes below the poverty level.

The poverty thresholds are revised annually to allow for

changes in the cost of living as reflected in the Consumer

Price Index. The average poverty threshold for a family of

four persons was $12,674 in 1989. (For more information,

see table A below.) Poverty thresholds were applied on a

national basis and were not adjusted for regional, State or

local variations in the cost of living. Therefore, the thresholds used for the Virgin Islands are the same as those used

in the United States. For a detailed discussion of the

poverty definition, see U.S. Bureau of the Census, Current

Population Reports, Series P-60, No. 171, Poverty in the

United States: 1988 and 1989.

Persons for Whom Poverty Status is Determined—

Poverty status was determined for all persons except

institutionalized persons, persons in military group quarters

and in college dormitories, and unrelated individuals under

15 years old. These groups also were excluded from the

denominator when calculating poverty rates.

Specified Poverty Levels—Since the poverty levels currently in use by the Federal Government do not meet all

the needs of data users, some of the data are presented

for alternate levels. These specified poverty levels are

obtained by multiplying the income cutoffs at the poverty

level by the appropriate factor. For example, the average

income cutoff at 125 percent of poverty level was $15,843

($12,674 x 1.25) in 1989 for a family of four persons.

Weighted Average Thresholds at the Poverty

Level—The average thresholds shown in the first column

of table A are weighted by the presence and number of

children. For example, the weighted average threshold for

a given family size is obtained by multiplying the threshold

for each presence and number of children category within

the given family size by the number of families in that

category. These products are then aggregated across the

entire range of presence and number of children categories, and the aggregate is divided by the total number of

families in the group to yield the weighted average threshold at the poverty level for that family size.

Since the basic thresholds used to determine the poverty status of families and unrelated individuals are applied

to all families and unrelated individuals, the weighted

average poverty thresholds are derived using all families

and unrelated individuals rather than just those classified

as being below the poverty level. To obtain the weighted

poverty thresholds for families and unrelated individuals

below alternate poverty levels, the weighted thresholds

shown in table A may be multiplied directly by the appropriate factor. The weighted average thresholds presented

in the table are based on the March 1990 Current Population Survey. However, these thresholds would not differ

significantly from those based on the 1990 census.

Income Deficit—Represents the difference between the

total income of families and unrelated individuals below the

poverty level and their respective poverty thresholds. In

computing the income deficit, families reporting a net

income loss are assigned zero dollars and for such cases

the deficit is equal to the poverty threshold.

This measure provided an estimate of the amount which

would be required to raise the incomes of all poor families

Table A. Poverty Thresholds in 1989 by Size of Family and Number of Related Children Under 18 Years

Size of Family Unit

Weighted

average

thresholds

Related children under 18 years

None One Two Three Four Five Six Seven

Eight or

more

One person (unrelated individual). $6,310

Under 65 years. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 451 $6,451

65 years and over . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,947 5,947

Two persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,076

Householder under 65 years . . . 8,343 8,303 $8,547

Householder 65 years and

over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,501 7,495 8,515

Three persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,885 9,699 9,981 $9,990

Four persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,674 12,790 12,999 12,575 $12,619

Five persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,990 15,424 15,648 15,169 14,798 $14,572

Six persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,921 17,740 17,811 17,444 17,092 16,569 $16,259

Seven persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,162 20,412 20,540 20,101 19,794 19,224 18,558 $17,828

Eight persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,328 22,830 23,031 22,617 22,253 21,738 21,084 20,403 $20,230

Nine or more persons . . . . . . . . . . 25,480 27,463 27,596 27,229 26,921 26,415 25,719 25,089 24,933 $23,973

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–23
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 24 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

and unrelated individuals to their respective poverty thresholds. The income deficit is thus a measure of the degree of

impoverishment of a family or unrelated individual. However, caution must be used in comparing the average

deficits of families with different characteristics. Apparent

differences in average income deficits may, to some

extent, be a function of differences in family size.

Mean Income Deficit—Represents the amount obtained

by dividing the total income deficit of a group below the

poverty level by the number of families (or unrelated

individuals) in that group.

Comparability—The poverty definition used in the 1990

and 1980 censuses differed slightly from the one used in

the 1970 census. Three technical modifications were

made to the definition used in the 1970 census as described

below:

1. The separate thresholds for families with a female

householder with no husband present and all other

families were eliminated. For the 1980 and 1990

censuses, the weighted average of the poverty thresholds for these two types of families was applied to all

types of families, regardless of the sex of the householder.

2. Farm families and farm unrelated individuals no longer

had a set of poverty thresholds that were lower than

the thresholds applied to nonfarm families and unrelated individuals. The farm thresholds were 85 percent

of the corresponding levels for nonfarm families in the

1970 census. The same thresholds were applied to all

families and unrelated individuals regardless of residence in 1980 and 1990.

3. The thresholds by size of family were extended from

seven or more persons in 1970 to nine or more

persons in 1980 and 1990.

These changes resulted in a minimal increase in the

number of poor at the national level. For a complete

discussion of these modifications and their impact, see the

Current Population Reports, Series P-60, No. 133.

The population covered in the poverty statistics derived

from the 1980 and 1990 censuses was essentially the

same as in the 1970 census. The only difference was that

in 1980 and 1990, unrelated individuals under 15 years old

were excluded from the poverty universe, while in 1970,

only those under 14 years old were excluded. The poverty

data from the 1960 census excluded all persons in group

quarters and included all unrelated individuals regardless

of age. It was unlikely that these differences in population

coverage would have had significant impact when comparing the poverty data for persons since the 1960 censuses.

RACE

The data on race were derived from answers to questionnaire item 4, which was asked of all persons. The

concept of race as used by the Census Bureau reflects

self-identification; it does not denote any clear-cut scientific definition of biological stock. The data for race represent self-classification by people according to the race

with which they most closely identify. Furthermore, it is

recognized that the categories of the race item include

both racial and national origin or socio-cultural groups.

During direct interviews conducted by enumerators, if a

person could not provide a single response to the race

question, he or she was asked to select, based on

self-identification, the group which best described his or

her racial identity. If a person could not provide a single

race response, the race of the mother was used. If a single

race response could not be provided for the person’s

mother, the first race reported by the person was used. In

all cases where occupied housing units, households, or

families are classified by race, the race of the householder

was used.

The racial classification used by the Census Bureau

generally adheres to the guidelines in Federal Statistical

Directive No. 15, issued by the Office of Management and

Budget, which provides standards on ethnic and racial

categories for statistical reporting to be used by all Federal

agencies. The racial categories used in the 1990 census

data products are provided below.

Black—Includes persons who indicated their race as

‘‘Black or Negro’’ or reported entries such as West Indian,

Jamaican, Haitian, Black Puerto Rican, African American,

or Afro-American.

White—Includes persons who indicated their race as

‘‘White’’ or reported entries such as French, German,

Dutch, Danish, Lebanese, Near Easterner, Arab, or Polish.

Asian or Pacific Islander—Includes persons who indicated their race as ‘‘Asian or Pacific Islander’’ or reported

entries such as Chinese, Filipino, Japanese, Hawaiian,

Samoan, or Guamanian.

American Indian, Eskimo, or Aleut—Includes persons

who classified themselves as such in one of the specific

race categories identified below.

American Indian—Includes persons who indicated their

race as ‘‘American Indian,’’ entered the name of an

Indian tribe, or reported such entries as Canadian

Indian, French-American Indian, or Spanish-American

Indian.

Eskimo—Includes persons who indicated their race as

‘‘Eskimo’’ or reported entries such as Arctic Slope,

Inupiat, and Yupik.

Aleut—Includes persons who indicated their race as

‘‘Aleut’’ or reported entries such as Alutiiq, Egegik, and

Pribilovian.

B–24 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 25 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Other Race—Includes all other persons not included in

the ‘‘Black,’’ ‘‘White,’’ ‘‘Asian or Pacific Islander,’’ or the

‘‘American Indian, Eskimo, or Aleut’’ race categories described

above. Persons reporting in the ‘‘Other race’’ category and

providing write-in entries such as multiracial, multiethnic,

mixed, interracial, or a Spanish/ Hispanic origin group

(such as Mexican, Cuban, or Puerto Rican) are included

here.

If the race entry for a member of a household was

missing on the questionnaire, race was assigned based

upon the reported entries of race by other household

members using specific rules of precedence of household

relationship. For example, if race was missing for the

daughter of the householder, then the race of her mother

(as female householder or female spouse) would be

assigned. If there was no female householder or spouse in

the household, the daughter would be assigned her father’s

(male householder) race. If race was not reported for

anyone in the household, the race of a householder in a

previously processed household was assigned. This procedure is a variation of the general imputation procedures

described in Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.

Limitation of the Data—In the 1990 census, respondents

sometimes did not fill in a check box or filled the ‘‘Other

race’’ check box and wrote in a response, such as West

Indian, in this write-in space for ‘‘Other race.’’ During the

coding and editing process, these responses were assigned

to the appropriate racial designation. Also, some Hispanic

origin persons did not mark a race category, but provided

entries such as Mexican or Puerto Rican. These persons

were classified in the ‘‘Other race’’ category during the

coding and editing process.

Comparability—Differences between the 1990 census

and earlier censuses affect the comparability of data for

certain racial groups. In the 1980 census, there were no

separate categories for persons identifying as ‘‘Asian or

Pacific Islander’’ or ‘‘Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut.’’

Persons who identified as such were reported in the

‘‘Other’’ category. In the 1990 census, there were separate

categories for ‘‘Asian or Pacific Islander’’ and ‘‘Indian

(Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut,’’ as well as two write-in spaces

allowing ‘‘Asian or Pacific Islander’’ persons or ‘‘Other

race’’ persons to identify specific race groups. (In 1980

there was just one write-in space for persons identifying as

‘‘Other.’’) Persons entering a write-in response had their

individual entries coded and classified to the appropriate

race regardless of whether they filled a check box. This

allowed for the accurate tabulation and reporting of persons identifying as ‘‘Asian or Pacific Islander’’ or ‘‘Indian

(Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut’’ along with those reporting as

‘‘Black or Negro’’ or ‘‘White’’ in the 1990 census.

REFERENCE WEEK

The data on labor force status and journey to work were

related to the reference week; that is, the calendar week

preceding the date on which the respondents were interviewed by enumerators. This week is not the same for all

respondents since the enumeration was not completed in

one week. The occurrence of holidays during the enumeration period could affect the data on actual hours worked

during the reference week, but probably had no effect on

overall measurement of employment status (see the discussion below on ‘‘Comparability’’).

Comparability—The reference weeks for the 1990 and

1980 censuses differ in that Passover and Good Friday

occurred in the first week of April 1980, but in the second

week of April 1990. Many workers presumably took time

off for those observances. The differing occurrence of

these holidays could affect the comparability of the 1990

and 1980 data on actual hours worked for some areas if

the respective weeks were the reference weeks for a

significant number of persons. The holidays probably did

not affect the overall measurement of employment status

since this information was based on work activity during

the entire reference week.

RESIDENCE IN 1985

The data on residence in 1985 were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 14b. This item asked for the

name of the island in the U.S. Virgin Islands, the U.S. State,

commonwealth, territory, or foreign country where the

person was living on April 1, 1985, for those persons

reporting in question 14a that on that date they lived in a

different house than their current residence. Residence in

1985 is used in conjunction with location of current residence to determine the extent of residential mobility of the

population and the resulting redistribution of the population

among the islands and between the islands and the U.S.

States and foreign countries.

When no information on residence in 1985 was reported

for a person, information for other family members, if

available, was used to assign a location of residence in

1985. All cases of nonresponse or incomplete response

that were not assigned a previous residence based on

information from other family members were allocated the

previous residence of another person with similar characteristics who provided complete information.

The tabulation category, ‘‘Same house,’’ includes all

persons 5 years old and over who did not move during the

5 years as well as those who had moved but by 1990 had

returned to their 1985 residence. The category, ‘‘Different

house in the U.S. Virgin Islands,’’ includes persons who

lived in the U.S. Virgin Islands in 1985 but in a different

house or apartment from the one they occupied on April 1,

1990. These movers are then further subdivided according

to the type of move.

In most tabulations, persons who moved within the U.S.

Virgin Islands are divided into those moving within the

same island and those moving from a different island.

Movers from outside the U.S. Virgin Islands are usually

divided into three groups according to their 1985 residence: ‘‘In the United States,’’ ‘‘On another Caribbean

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–25
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 26 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

island,’’ and ‘‘Elsewhere.’’ The last group ‘‘Elsewhere,’’

includes those persons who were residing in a foreign

country, Puerto Rico, or another outlying area of the U.S. in

1985, including members of the Armed Forces and their

dependents.

The number of persons who were living in a different

house in 1985 is somewhat less than the total number of

moves during the 5-year period. Some persons in the same

house at the two dates had moved during the 5-year period

but by the time of the census had returned to their 1985

residence. Other persons who were living in a different

house had made one or more intermediate moves. For

similar reasons, the number of persons living on a different

island may be understated.

Comparability—Similar questions were asked in the 1970

and 1980 censuses but nonresponse was not allocated in

those earlier censuses.

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND LABOR FORCE

STATUS

Tabulation of data on enrollment, educational attainment, and labor force status for the population 16 to 19

years old allows for calculation of the proportion of the age

group who are not enrolled in school and not high school

graduates or ‘‘dropouts’’ and an unemployment rate for the

‘‘dropout’’ population. Definitions of the three topics and

descriptions of the census items from which they were

derived are presented in ‘‘Educational Attainment,’’ ‘‘Employment Status,’’ and ‘‘School Enrollment and Type of School.’’

The published tabulations include both the civilian and

Armed Forces populations, but labor force status is provided for the civilian population only. Therefore, the component labor force statuses may not add to the total lines

enrolled in school, high school graduate, and not high

school graduate. The difference is Armed Forces.

Comparability—The tabulation of school enrollment by

labor force status is similar to that published in 1980

census reports. The 1980 census tabulation included a

single data line for Armed Forces; however, enrollment,

attainment, and labor force status data were shown for the

civilian population only. In 1970, a tabulation was included

for 16 to 21 year old males not attending school.

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND TYPE OF SCHOOL

Data on school enrollment were derived from answers

to questionnaire item 11, which was asked of all persons.

Persons were classified as enrolled in school if they

reported attending a ‘‘regular’’ public or private school or

college at any time between February 1, 1990, and the

time of enumeration. The question included instructions to

‘‘include only nursery school, kindergarten, elementary

school, and schooling which would lead to a high school

diploma or a college degree’’ as regular school. The

interviewers were instructed that enrollment in a trade or

business school, company training, or tutoring were not to

be included unless the course would be accepted for credit

at a regular elementary school, high school, or college.

Persons who did not answer the enrollment question were

assigned the enrollment status and type of school of a

person with the same age, race or Hispanic origin, and, at

older ages, sex, whose residence was in the same or a

nearby area.

Public and Private School—Includes persons who attended

school in the reference period and indicated they were

enrolled by marking one of the questionnaire categories for

either ‘‘public school, public college’’ or ‘‘private school,

private college.’’ A public school is defined as ‘‘any school

or college controlled and supported by the local or Federal

Government.’’ Schools supported and controlled primarily

by religious organizations or other private groups are

defined as private. Persons who filled both the ‘‘public’’

and ‘‘private’’ circles are edited to the first entry, ‘‘public.’’

Level of School in Which Enrolled—Persons who were

enrolled in school were classified as enrolled in ‘‘preprimary school,’’ ‘‘elementary or high school,’’ or ‘‘college’’

according to their response to question 12 (years of school

completed or highest degree received). Persons who were

enrolled and reported completing nursery school or less

were classified as enrolled in ‘‘preprimary school,’’ which

includes kindergarten. Similarly, enrolled persons who had

completed at least kindergarten, but not high school, were

classified as enrolled in elementary or high school. Enrolled

persons who reported completing high school or some

college or having received a post-secondary degree were

classified as enrolled in ‘‘college.’’ Enrolled persons who

reported completing the twelfth grade but receiving ‘‘NO

DIPLOMA’’ were classified as enrolled in high school. (For

more information on level of school, see the discussion

under ‘‘Educational Attainment.’’)

Comparability—School enrollment questions have been

included in the decennial census since 1930; grade attended

was first asked in 1950; type of school was first asked in

1970. In 1930, the enrollment question referred to attendance since September 1. In 1940, the reference was to

attendance in the month preceding the census, and in the

1950 and subsequent censuses, the question referred to

attendance in the two months preceding the census date.

In past years, instructions on the types of schools to

include have changed. In the 1950 instructions, the term

‘‘regular school’’ was introduced, and it was defined as

schooling which ‘‘advances a person towards an elementary or high school diploma or a college, university, or

professional school degree.’’ Vocational, trade, or business schools were excluded unless they were graded and

considered part of a regular school system. On-the-job

training was excluded, as were nursery school and kindergarten. Instruction by correspondence was excluded unless

it was given by a regular school and counted towards

promotion.

B–26 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 27 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

In 1960, the question used the term ‘‘regular school or

college’’ and a similar, though expanded, definition of

‘‘regular’’ was included in the instructions, which continued

to exclude nursery school, but included kindergarten. In

the 1970 census, the questionnaire used the phrase

‘‘regular school or college’’ and included instructions to

‘‘count nursery school, kindergarten, and schooling which

leads to an elementary school certificate, high school

diploma, or college degree.’’

The age range for which enrollment data have been

obtained and published has varied over the censuses.

Information on enrollment was recorded for persons 5 to

24 years old in 1940; for persons 5 to 29 years old in 1950;

for persons age 5 to 34 in 1960; and for those 3 years old

and over since 1970. Most of the published enrollment

figures referred to persons 5 to 24 in 1940, 5 to 29 in 1950,

5 to 34 in 1960, 3 to 34 in 1970, and 3 years old and over

in 1980 and 1990. This growth in the age group whose

enrollment was reported reflects increased interest in the

number of children in preprimary schools and in the

number of older persons attending colleges and universities.

In the 1950 and subsequent censuses, college students

were enumerated where they lived while attending college,

whereas in earlier censuses, they generally were enumerated at their parental homes. This change should not affect

the comparability of national figures on college enrollment

since 1940; however, it may affect the comparability over

time of enrollment figures at sub-national levels.

Type of school was first introduced in the 1970 census.

The type of school was incorporated into the yes... response

categories for the enrollment question. The types identified

were ‘‘public,’’ ‘‘parochial,’’ and ‘‘other private.’’ In the

1980 census, ‘‘private, church related’’ and ‘‘private, not

church related’’ replaced ‘‘parochial’’ and ‘‘other private.’’

Grade of enrollment was first available in the 1950

census, where it was obtained from responses to the

question on highest grade of school completed. Enumerators were instructed that ‘‘for a person still in school, the

last grade completed will be the grade preceding the one

in which he or she was now enrolled.’’ From 1960 to 1980,

grade of enrollment was obtained from the highest grade

attended in the two-part question used to measure educational attainment. (For more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Educational Attainment.’’) The form of the

question from which level of enrollment was derived in the

1990 census most closely corresponds to the question

used in 1950. While data from prior censuses can be

aggregated to provide levels of enrollment comparable to

the 1990 census, 1990 data cannot be disaggregated to

show single grade of enrollment as in previous censuses.

Data on school enrollment were also collected and

published by other Federal and local government agencies. Where these data were obtained from administrative

records of school systems and institutions of higher learning, they were only roughly comparable with data from

population censuses and household surveys because of

differences in definitions and concepts, subject matter

covered, time references, and enumeration methods. At

the local level, the difference between the location of the

institution and the residence of the student may affect the

comparability of census and administrative data. Differences between the boundaries of school districts and

census geographic units also may affect these comparisons.

SELF-CARE LIMITATION STATUS

The data on self-care limitation status were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 19b, which was asked of all

persons 15 years old and over. Persons were identified as

having a self-care limitation if they had a health condition

that had lasted for 6 or more months and which made it

difficult to take care of their own personal needs, such as

dressing, bathing, or getting around inside the home.

The term ‘‘health condition’’ referred to both physical

and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such

as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally was

not considered a health condition.

Comparability—This was the first time that a question on

self-care limitation was included in the census.

Sex Ratio—A measure derived by dividing the total number of males by the total number of females and multiplying

by 100.

Comparability—A question on the sex of individuals has

been asked of the total population in every census.

SEX

The data on sex were derived from answers to questionnaire item 3, which was asked of all persons. For most

cases in which sex was not reported, it was determined by

the appropriate entry from the person’s given name and

household relationship. Otherwise, sex was imputed according to the relationship to the householder and the age and

marital status of the person. (For more information on

imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.)

Sex Ratio—A measure derived by dividing the total number of males by the total number of females and multiplying

by 100.

Comparability—A question on the sex of individuals has

been asked of the total population in every census.

VETERAN STATUS

Data on veteran status, period of military service, and

years of military service were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 17, which was asked of all persons.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–27
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 28 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Veteran Status—The data on veteran status were derived

from responses to question 17a. For census data products, a ‘‘civilian veteran’’ is a person 16 years old or over

who had served (even for a short time) but is not now

serving on active duty in the U.S. Army, Navy, Air Force,

Marine Corps, or the Coast Guard, or who served as a

Merchant Marine seaman during World War II. Persons

who served in the National Guard or military Reserves are

classified as veterans only if they were ever called or

ordered to active duty not counting the 4-6 months for

initial training or yearly summer camps. All other civilians

16 years old and over are classified as nonveterans.

Period of Military Service—Persons who indicated in

question 17a that they had served on active duty (civilian

veterans) or were now on active duty were asked to

indicate in question 17b the period or periods in which they

served. Persons serving in at least one wartime period are

classified in their most recent wartime period. For example,

persons who served both during the Korean conflict and

the post-Korean peacetime era between February 1955

and July 1964 are classified in one of the two ‘‘Korean

conflict’’ categories. If the same person had also served

during the Vietnam era, he or she would instead be

included in the ‘‘Vietnam era and Korean conflict’’ category. The responses were edited to eliminate inconsistencies between reported period(s) of service and the age of

the person and to cancel out reported combinations of

periods containing unreasonable gaps (for example, a

person could not serve during World War I and the Korean

conflict without serving during World War II). Note that the

period of service categories shown in this report are

mutually exclusive.

Years of Military Service—Persons who indicated in

question 17a that they had served on active duty (civilian

veterans) or were now on active duty were asked to report

the total number of years of active-duty service in question

17c. The data were edited for consistency with responses

to question 17b (Period of Military Service) and with the

age of the person.

Limitation of the Data—There may be a tendency for the

following kinds of persons to report erroneously that they

served on active duty in the Armed Forces: (a) persons

who served in the National Guard or military Reserves but

were never called to active duty; (b) civilian employees or

volunteers for the USO, Red Cross, or the Department of

Defense (or its predecessor Departments, War and Navy);

and (c) employees of the Merchant Marine or Public Health

Service. There may also be a tendency for persons to

erroneously round up months to the nearest year in

question 17c (for example, persons with 1 year 8 months

of active duty military service may mistakenly report ‘‘2

years’’).

Comparability—Since census data on veterans were

based on self-reported responses, they may differ from

data from other sources such as administrative records of

the Department of Defense. Census data may also differ

from Veterans Administration data on the benefits-eligible

population, since factors determining eligibility for veterans

benefits differ from the rules for classifying veterans in the

census.

The wording of the question on veteran status (17a) for

1990 was expanded from the veteran/ not veteran question in 1980 to include questions on current active duty

status and service in the military Reserves and the National

Guard. The expansion was intended to clarify the appropriate response for persons in the Armed Forces and for

persons who served in the National Guard or military

Reserve units only. For the first time in a census, service

during World War II as a Merchant Marine Seaman was

considered active-duty military service and persons with

such service were counted as veterans. An additional

period of military service, ‘‘September 1980 or later’’ was

added in 1990. As in 1970 and 1980, persons reporting

more than one period of service are shown in the most

recent wartime period of service category. Question 17c

(Years of Military Service) was new for 1990.

WORK DISABILITY STATUS

The data on work disability were derived from answers

to questionnaire item 18, which was asked of all persons

15 years old and over. Persons were identified as having a

work disability if they had a health condition that had lasted

for 6 or more months and which limited the kind or amount

of work they could do at a job or business. A person was

limited in the kind of work he or she could do if the person

had a health condition which restricted his or her choice of

jobs. A person was limited in the amount of work if he or

she was not able to work full-time. Persons with a work

disability were further classified as ‘‘Prevented from working’’ or ‘‘Not prevented from working.’’

The term ‘‘health condition’’ referred to both physical

and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such

as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally, was

not considered a health condition.

Comparability—The wording of the question on work

disability was the same in 1990 as in 1980. Information on

work disability was first collected in 1970. In that census,

the work disability question did not contain a clause

restricting the definition of disability to limitations caused

by a health condition that had lasted 6 or more months;

however, it did contain a separate question about the

duration of the disability.

WORK STATUS IN 1989

The data on work status in 1989 were derived from

answers to questionnaire item 31, which was asked of all

persons. Persons 16 years old and over who worked 1 or

more weeks according to the criteria described below are

classified as ‘‘Worked in 1989.’’ All other persons 16 years

B–28 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 29 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

old and over are classified as ‘‘Did not work in 1989.’’

Some tabulations showing work status in 1989 include 15

year olds; these persons, by definition, are classified as

‘‘Did not work in 1989.’’

Weeks Worked in 1989

The data on weeks worked in 1989 were derived from

responses to questionnaire item 31b. Question 31b (Weeks

Worked in 1989) was asked of persons 16 years old and

over who indicated in question 31a that they worked in

1989.

The data pertain to the number of weeks during 1989 in

which a person did any work for pay or profit (including paid

vacation and paid sick leave) or worked without pay on a

family farm or in a family business. Weeks of active service

in the Armed Forces are also included.

Usual Hours Worked Per Week Worked in 1989

The data on usual hours worked per week worked in

1989 were derived from answers to questionnaire item

31c. This question was asked of persons 16 years old and

over who indicated that they worked in 1989.

The data pertain to the number of hours a person

usually worked during the weeks worked in 1989. The

respondent was to report the number of hours worked per

week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in

1989. If the hours worked per week varied considerably

during 1989, the respondent was to report an approximate

average of the hours worked per week. The statistics on

usual hours worked per week in 1989 are not necessarily

related to the data on actual hours worked during the

census reference week (question 21b).

Persons 16 years old and over who reported that they

usually worked 35 or more hours each week during the

weeks they worked are classified as ‘‘Usually worked full

time;’’ persons who reported that they usually worked 1 to

34 hours are classified as ‘‘Usually worked part time.’’

Year-Round Full-Time Workers—All persons 16 years

old and over who usually worked 35 hours or more per

week for 50 to 52 weeks in 1989.

Number of Workers in Family in 1989—The term ‘‘worker’’

as used for these data is defined based on the criteria for

Work Status in 1989.

Limitation of the Data—It is probable that the number of

persons who worked in 1989 and the number of weeks

worked are understated since there was some tendency

for respondents to forget intermittent or short periods of

employment or to exclude weeks worked without pay.

There may also be a tendency for persons not to include

weeks of paid vacation among their weeks worked; one

result may be that the census figures may understate the

number of persons who worked ‘‘50 to 52 weeks.’’

Comparability—The data on weeks worked collected in

the 1990 census were comparable with data from the

1980, 1970, and 1960 censuses, but may not be entirely

comparable with data from the 1940 and 1950 censuses.

Since the 1960 census, two separate questions have been

used to obtain this information. The first identified persons

with any work experience during the year and, thus,

indicated those persons for whom the questions on number of weeks worked applied. In 1940 and 1950, however,

the questionnaires contained only a single question on

number of weeks worked.

In 1970, persons responded to the question on weeks

worked by indicating one of six weeks-worked intervals. In

1980 and 1990, persons were asked to enter the specific

number of weeks they worked.

YEAR OF ENTRY

The data on year of entry were derived from answers to

questionnaire item 10, which was asked of all persons. The

question, ‘‘When did this person come to the U.S. Virgin

Islands to stay?’’ was asked of persons who indicated in

the question on citizenship that they were not born in the

U.S. Virgin Islands. (For more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Citizenship.’’)

The 1990 census questions, tabulations, and census

data products about citizenship and year of entry include

no reference to immigration. All persons who were born

and resided outside the U.S. Virgin Islands before becoming residents of the U.S. Virgin Islands have a date of entry.

Some of these persons are U.S. citizens by birth (e.g.,

persons born in Puerto Rico or born abroad of American

parents). To avoid any possible confusion concerning the

date of entry of persons who are U.S. citizens by birth, the

term, ‘‘year of entry’’ is used in this report instead of the

term ‘‘year of immigration.’’

Limitation of the Data—The census questions on nativity,

citizenship, and year of entry were not designed to measure the degree of permanence of residence in the United

States. The phrase, ‘‘to stay’’ was used to obtain the year

in which the person became a resident of the United

States. Although the respondent was directed to indicate

the year he or she entered the country ‘‘to stay,’’ it was

difficult to ensure that respondents interpreted the phrase

correctly.

Comparability—A question on year of entry, (alternately

called ‘‘year of immigration’’) was asked in the 1970 and

1980 censuses. In 1980, the question on year of entry

included six arrival time intervals. The number of arrival

intervals was expanded to ten in 1990. In 1980, the

question on year of entry was asked only of the foreignborn population. In 1990, all persons not born in the Virgin

Islands were to complete the question on year of entry.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–29
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 30 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS

LIVING QUARTERS

Living quarters are classified as either housing units or

group quarters. (For more information, see the discussion

under ‘‘Group Quarters.’’) Usually, living quarters are in

structures intended for residential use (for example, a

one-family home, apartment house, hotel or motel, boarding house, or mobile home). Living quarters also may be in

structures intended for nonresidential use (for example,

the rooms in a warehouse where a guard lives), as well as

in places such as tents, vans, shelters for the homeless,

and dormitories.

Housing Units—A housing unit is a house, an apartment,

a mobile home or trailer, a group of rooms or a single room

occupied as separate living quarters or, if vacant, intended

for occupancy as separate living quarters. Separate living

quarters are those in which the occupants live and eat

separately from any other persons in the building and

which have direct access from outside the building or

through a common hall.

The occupants may be a single family, one person living

alone, two or more families living together, or any other

group of related or unrelated persons who share living

arrangements. For vacant units, the criteria of separateness and direct access are applied to the intended occupants whenever possible. If that information cannot be

obtained, the criteria are applied to the previous occupants.

Both occupied and vacant housing units are included in

the housing unit inventory, except that recreational vehicles, boats, vans, tents, and the like are included only if

they are occupied as someone’s usual place of residence.

Vacant mobile homes are included provided they are

intended for occupancy on the site where they stand.

Vacant mobile homes on dealers’ sales lots, or in storage

yards are excluded from the housing inventory.

If the living quarters contain 9 or more persons unrelated to the householder or person in charge (a total of 10

unrelated persons), they are classified as group quarters. If

the living quarters contain eight or fewer persons unrelated

to the householder or person in charge, they are classified

as housing units.

Occupied Housing Units—A housing unit is classified as

occupied if it is the usual place of residence of the person

or group of persons living in it at the time of enumeration,

or if the occupants are only temporarily absent; that is,

away on vacation. If all the persons staying in the unit at

the time of the census have their usual place of residence

elsewhere, the unit is classified as vacant. A household

includes all the persons who occupy a housing unit as their

usual place of residence. By definition, the count of

occupied housing units for 100-percent tabulations is the

same as the count of households or householders.

Vacant Housing Units—A housing unit is vacant if no one

is living in it at the time of enumeration, unless its occupants are only temporarily absent. Units temporarily occupied at the time of enumeration entirely by persons who

have a usual residence elsewhere are also classified as

vacant. (For more information, see discussion under ‘‘Usual

Home Elsewhere.’’)

New units not yet occupied are classified as vacant

housing units if construction has reached a point where all

exterior windows and doors are installed and final usable

floors are in place. Vacant units are excluded if they are

open to the elements; that is, the roof, walls, windows,

and/ or doors no longer protect the interior from the

elements, or if there is positive evidence (such as a sign on

the house or in the block) that the unit is condemned or is

to be demolished. Also excluded are quarters being used

entirely for nonresidential purposes, such as a store or an

office, or quarters used for the storage of business supplies or inventory, machinery, or agricultural products.

Hotels, Motels, Rooming Houses, Etc.—Occupied rooms

or suites of rooms in hotels, motels, and similar places are

classified as housing units only when occupied by permanent residents; that is, persons who consider the hotel as

their usual place of residence or have no usual place of

residence elsewhere. Vacant rooms or suites of rooms are

classified as housing units only in those hotels, motels, and

similar places in which 75 percent or more of the accommodations are occupied by permanent residents.

If any of the occupants in a rooming or boarding house

live and eat separately from others in the building and have

direct access, their quarters are classified as separate

housing units.

Staff Living Quarters—The living quarters occupied by

staff personnel within any group quarters are separate

housing units if they satisfy the housing unit criteria of

separateness and direct access; otherwise, they are considered group quarters.

Comparability—The first Census of Housing in 1940

established the ‘‘dwelling unit’’ concept. Although the term

became ‘‘housing unit’’ and the definition has been modified slightly in succeeding censuses, the 1990 definition is

essentially comparable to previous censuses. There was

no change in the housing unit definition between 1980 and

1990.

ACREAGE

The data on acreage were obtained from questionnaire

items H5a and H19a. Questions H5a and H19a were asked

at all occupied and vacant one-family houses and mobile

homes.

Question H5a asks whether the house or mobile home

is located on a place of 10 or more acres. The intent of this

item is to exclude owner-occupied and renter-occupied

one-family houses on 10 or more acres from the specified

owner- and renter-occupied universes for value and rent

tabulations.

B–30 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 31 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Question H19a provides data on whether the unit is

located on less than 1 acre, 1 to 9 acres, or 10 or more

acres. The main purpose of this item, in conjunction with

question H19b on agricultural sales, is to identify farm

units. (For more information, see discussion under ‘‘Farm

Residence.’’)

For both items, the land may consist of more than one

tract or plot. These tracts or plots are usually adjoining;

however, they may be separated by a road, creek, another

piece of land, etc.

AGRICULTURAL SALES

Data on the sales of agricultural crops were obtained

from questionnaire item H19b, which was asked at occupied one-family houses and mobile homes located on lots

of 1 acre or more. Data for this item exclude units on lots

of less than 1 acre, units located in structures containing 2

or more units, and all vacant units. This item refers to the

total amount (before taxes and expenses) received in 1989

from the sale of crops, vegetables, fruits, nuts, livestock

and livestock products, and nursery and forest products,

produced on ‘‘this property.’’ Respondents new to a unit

were asked to estimate total agricultural sales in 1989

even if some portion of the sales had been made by other

occupants of the unit.

This item is used mainly to classify housing units as farm

or nonfarm residences, not to provide detailed information

on the sale of agricultural products. Detailed information

on the sale of agricultural products is provided by the

Census Bureau’s Census of Agriculture. (For more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Farm Residence.’’)

BEDROOMS

The data on bedrooms were obtained from questionnaire item H9, which was asked at both occupied and

vacant housing units. The number of bedrooms is the

count of rooms designed to be used as bedrooms; that is,

the number of rooms that would be listed as bedrooms if

the house or apartment were on the market for sale or for

rent. Included are all rooms intended to be used as

bedrooms even if they currently are being used for some

other purpose. A housing unit consisting of only one room,

such as a one-room efficiency apartment, is classified, by

definition, as having no bedroom.

Comparability—Data on bedrooms have been collected

in every census since 1960. In 1970 and 1980, data for

bedrooms were shown only for year-round units. In past

censuses, a room was defined as a bedroom if it was used

mainly for sleeping even if also used for other purposes.

Rooms that were designed to be used as bedrooms but

used mainly for other purposes were not considered to be

bedrooms. A distribution of housing units by number of

bedrooms calculated from data collected in a U.S. 1986

U.S. test showed virtually no differences in the two versions except in the two bedroom category, where the

previous ‘‘use’’ definition showed a slightly lower proportion of units.

BOARDED-UP STATUS

Boarded-up status was obtained from questionnaire

item C2 and was determined for all vacant units. Boarded-up

units have windows and doors covered by wood, metal, or

masonry to protect the interior and to prevent entry into the

building. A single-unit structure, a unit in a multi-unit

structure, or an entire multi-unit structure may be boarded-up

in this way. For certain census data products, boarded-up

units are shown only for units in the ‘‘Other vacant’’

category. A unit classified as ‘‘Usual home elsewhere’’ can

never be boarded up. (For more information, see the

discussion under ‘‘Usual Home Elsewhere.’’)

Comparability—This item was first asked in the 1980

census and was shown only for year-round vacant housing

units. In 1990, data are shown for all vacant housing units.

BUSINESS ON PROPERTY

The data for business on property were obtained from

questionnaire item H5b, which was asked at all occupied

and vacant one-family houses and mobile homes. This

question is used to exclude owner-occupied one-family

houses with business or medical offices on the property

from certain statistics on financial characteristics.

A business must be easily recognizable from the outside. It will usually have a separate outside entrance and

have the appearance of a business, such as a grocery

store, restaurant, or barbershop. It may be either attached

to the house or mobile home or be located elsewhere on

the property. Those housing units in which a room is used

for business or professional purposes and have no recognizable alterations to the outside are not considered as

having a business. Medical offices are considered businesses for tabulation purposes.

Comparability—Data on business on property have been

collected for the Virgin Islands since 1940.

CONDOMINIUM FEE

The data on condominium fee were obtained from

questionnaire item H25, which was asked at owner-occupied

condominiums. A condominium fee normally is charged

monthly to the owners of the individual condominium units

by the condominium owners association to cover operating, maintenance, administrative, and improvement costs

of the common property (grounds, halls, lobby, parking

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–31
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 32 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

areas, laundry rooms, swimming pool, etc.) The costs for

utilities and/ or fuels may be included in the condominium

fee if the units do not have separate meters.

Data on condominium fees may include real estate tax

and/ or insurance payments for the common property, but

do not include real estate taxes or fire, hazard, and flood

insurance for the individual unit already reported in questions H21 and H22.

Amounts reported were the regular monthly payment,

even if paid by someone outside the household or remain

unpaid. Costs were estimated as closely as possible when

exact costs were not known.

The data from this item were added to payments for

mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home

equity loans); real estate taxes; fire, hazard, and flood

insurance payments; and utilities and fuels to derive ‘‘Selected

Monthly Owner Costs’’ and ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner

Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989’’ for

condominium owners.

Comparability—This is a new item in 1990.

CONDOMINIUM STATUS

The data on condominium housing units were obtained

from questionnaire item H18, which was asked at both

occupied and vacant housing units. Condominium is a type

of ownership that enables a person to own an apartment or

house in a development of similarly owned units and to

hold a common or joint ownership in some or all of the

common areas and facilities such as land, roof, hallways,

entrances, elevators, swimming pool, etc. Condominiums

may be single-family houses as well as units in apartment

buildings. A condominium unit need not be occupied by the

owner to be counted as such. A unit classified as ‘‘mobile

home or trailer’’ or ‘‘other’’ (see discussion under ‘‘Units in

Structure’’) cannot be a condominium unit.

Limitation of the Data—Testing done prior to the 1980

and 1990 censuses indicated that the number of condominiums may be slightly overstated.

Comparability—In 1970, condominiums were grouped

together with cooperative housing units, and the data were

reported only for owner-occupied cooperatives and condominiums. Beginning in 1980, the census identified all

condominium units and the data were shown for renteroccupied and vacant year-round condominiums as well as

owner occupied.

CONTRACT RENT

The data on contract rent (also referred to as ‘‘rent

asked’’ for vacant units) were obtained from questionnaire

item H7a, which was asked at all occupied housing units

that were rented for cash rent and all vacant housing units

that were for rent at the time of enumeration.

Housing units that are renter occupied without payment

of cash rent are shown separately as ‘‘No cash rent’’ in

census data products. The unit may be owned by friends or

relatives who live elsewhere and who allow occupancy

without charge. Rent-free houses or apartments may be

provided to compensate caretakers, ministers, tenant farmers, sharecroppers, or others.

Contract rent is the monthly rent agreed to or contracted for, regardless of any furnishings, utilities, fees,

meals, or services that may be included. For vacant units,

it is the monthly rent asked for the rental unit at the time of

enumeration.

If the contract rent includes rent for a business unit or

for living quarters occupied by another household, the

respondent was instructed to report that part of the rent

estimated to be for his or her unit only. Respondents were

asked to report rent only for the housing unit enumerated

and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for

business premises.

If a renter pays rent to the owner of a condominium or

cooperative, and the condominium fee or cooperative

carrying charge is also paid by the renter to the owner, the

respondent was instructed to include the fee or carrying

charge.

If a renter receives payments from lodgers or roomers

who are listed as members of the household, the respondent was instructed to report the rent without deduction for

any payments received from the lodgers or roomers. The

respondent was instructed to report the rent agreed to or

contracted for even if paid by someone else such as

friends or relatives living elsewhere, or a church or welfare

agency.

In some tabulations, contract rent is presented for all

renter-occupied housing units, as well as specified renteroccupied and specified vacant-for-rent units. Specified

renter-occupied and specified vacant-for-rent units exclude

one-family houses and mobile homes on 10 or more acres.

(For more information on rent, see the discussion under

‘‘Gross Rent.’’)

Median and Quartile Contract Rent—The median divides

the rent distribution into two equal parts. Quartiles divide

the rent distribution into four equal parts. In computing

median and quartile contract rent, units reported as ‘‘No

cash rent’’ are excluded. Median and quartile rent calculations are rounded to the nearest whole dollar. (For more

information on medians and quartiles, see the discussion

under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Aggregate Contract Rent—To calculate aggregate contract rent, the amount assigned for the category ‘‘less than

$80’’ is $50. The amount assigned to the category ‘‘$1,000

or more’’ is $1,250. Mean contract rent is rounded to the

nearest whole dollar. (For more information on aggregates

and means, see the discussion under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Comparability—Data on this item have been collected

since 1930. For 1990, quartiles were added because the

B–32 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 33 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

range of rents and values in the Virgin Islands has increased

in recent years. Upper and lower quartiles can be used to

note large rent and value differences among various

geographic areas.

COOKING FUEL

The data on cooking fuel were obtained from questionnaire item H14, which was asked at occupied housing

units. The data show the type of fuel used most for

cooking.

Bottled or Tank Gas—Includes liquid propane gas stored

in bottles or tanks which are refilled or exchanged when

empty.

Fuel Oil, Kerosene, Etc.—Includes fuel oil, kerosene,

gasoline, alcohol, and other combustible liquids.

Wood or charcoal—Includes purchased wood or charcoal, wood cut by household members on their property or

elsewhere, driftwood, sawmill or construction scraps, or

the like.

Other Fuel—Includes all other fuels not specified elsewhere.

No Fuel Used—Includes units that do not use any fuel or

that do not have kitchen facilities.

Comparability—Data on cooking fuel were collected for

the first time in 1980.

DURATION OF VACANCY

The data for duration of vacancy (also referred to as

‘‘months vacant’’) were obtained from questionnaire item

D, which was completed by census enumerators. The

statistics on duration of vacancy refer to the length of time

(in months and years) between the date the last occupants

moved from the unit and the time of enumeration. The

data, therefore, do not provide a direct measure of the total

length of time units remain vacant.

For newly constructed units which have never been

occupied, the duration of vacancy is counted from the date

construction was completed. For recently converted or

merged units, the time is reported from the date conversion or merger was completed. Units occupied by an entire

household with a usual home elsewhere are assigned to

the ‘‘Less than 1 month’’ interval.

Comparability—Similar data were collected in 1980. These

data were shown in 1980 only for year-round housing units.

In 1990, these data are shown for all housing units.

FARM RESIDENCE

The data on farm residence were obtained from questionnaire items H19a and H19b. An occupied one-family

house or mobile home is classified as a farm residence if:

(1) the housing unit is located on a property of 1 acre or

more, and (2) at least $100 worth of agricultural products

were sold from the property in 1989. Group quarters and

housing units that are in multi-unit buildings or vacant are

not included as farm residences.

A one-family unit occupied by a tenant household

paying cash rent for land and buildings is enumerated as a

farm residence only if sales of agricultural products from its

yard (as opposed to the general property on which it is

located) amounted to at least $100 in 1989. A one-family

unit occupied by a tenant household that does not pay

cash rent is enumerated as a farm residence if the

remainder of the farm (including its yard) qualifies as a

farm.

Farm residence is provided as an independent data item

only for housing units located in rural areas. It may be

derived for housing units in urban areas from the data

items on acreage and sales of agricultural products on the

public-use microdata sample (PUMS) files. (For more

information on PUMS, see Appendix F, Data Products and

User Assistance.)

The farm population consists of persons in households

living in farm residences. Some persons who are counted

on a property classified as a farm (including in some cases

farm workers) are excluded from the farm population. Such

persons include those who reside in multi-unit buildings or

group quarters.

Comparability—Farm residence was not defined in the

1980 Census of the Virgin Islands. Note that the definition

of a farm residence differs from the definition of a farm in

the Census of Agriculture (Factfinder for the Nation: Agricultural Statistics, Bureau of the Census, 1989).

GROSS RENT

Gross rent is the contract rent plus the estimated

average monthly cost of utilities (electricity, gas, and

water) and fuels (oil, charcoal, kerosene, wood, etc.) if

these are paid for by the renter (or paid for the renter by

someone else). Gross rent is intended to eliminate differentials which result from varying practices with respect to

the inclusion of utilities and fuels as part of the rental

payment. Renter units occupied without payment of cash

rent are shown separately as ‘‘No cash rent’’ in the

tabulations.

Comparability—Data on gross rent have been collected

since 1940 for renter-occupied housing units.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–33
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 34 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

GROSS RENT AS A PERCENTAGE OF

HOUSEHOLD INCOME IN 1989

Gross rent as a percentage of household income in

1989 is a computed ratio of monthly gross rent to monthly

household income (total household income in 1989 divided

by 12). The ratio was computed separately for each unit

and was rounded to the nearest whole percentage. Units

for which no cash rent is paid and units occupied by

households that reported no income or a net loss in 1989

comprise the category ‘‘Not computed.’’

INSURANCE FOR FIRE, HAZARD, AND FLOOD

The data on fire, hazard, and flood insurance were

obtained from questionnaire item H22, which was asked at

all owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, and

mobile homes. The statistics for this item refer to the

annual premium for fire, hazard, and flood insurance on the

property (land and buildings); that is, policies that protect

the property and its contents against loss due to damage

by fire, lightning, winds, hail, flood, explosion, and so on.

Liability policies are included only if they are paid with

the fire, hazard, and flood insurance premiums and the

amounts for fire, hazard, and flood cannot be separated.

Premiums are included even if paid by someone outside

the household or remain unpaid. When premiums are paid

on other than a yearly basis, the premiums are converted

to a yearly basis.

The payment for fire, hazard, and flood insurance is

added to payments for real estate taxes, utilities, fuels, and

mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home

equity loans) to derive ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs’’

and ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of

Household Income in 1989.’’

A separate question (H23d) determines whether insurance premiums are included in the mortgage payment to

the lender(s). This makes it possible to avoid counting

these premiums twice in the computations.

Comparability—Data on payment for fire and hazard

insurance were collected for the first time in 1980. Flood

insurance was not specifically mentioned in the wording of

the question in 1980. The question was asked only at

owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile

homes, condominiums, houses with a business or medical

office on the property, houses on 10 or more acres, and

housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the question

was asked of all one-family owner-occupied houses, including houses on 10 or more acres. It also was asked at

mobile homes, condominiums, and one-family houses with

a business or medical office on the property.

KITCHEN FACILITIES

Data on kitchen facilities were obtained from questionnaire item H11, which was asked at both occupied and

vacant housing units. A unit has complete kitchen facilities

when it has all of the following: (1) an installed sink with

piped water, (2) a range, cook top and convection or

microwave oven, or cookstove, and (3) a refrigerator. All

kitchen facilities must be located in the structure. They

need not be in the same room. Portable cooking equipment is not considered a range or cookstove. An ice box is

not considered to be a refrigerator.

Comparability–Earlier censuses collected data on individual components, such as kitchen sink and type of refrigeration equipment.

MEALS INCLUDED IN RENT

The data on meals included in the rent were obtained

from questionnaire item H7b, which was asked of all

occupied housing units that were rented for cash and all

vacant housing units that were for rent at the time of

enumeration.

The statistics on meals included in rent are presented

for specified renter-occupied and specified vacant-for-rent

units. Specified renter-occupied and specified vacant-forrent units exclude one-family houses on 10 or more acres.

(For more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Contract

Rent.’’)

Comparability—This is a new item in 1990. It is intended

to measure ‘‘congregate’’ housing which is generally considered to be housing units where the rent includes meals

and other services, such as transportation to shopping and

recreation.

MOBILE HOME OR BOAT COSTS

The data on mobile home/ boat costs were obtained

from questionnaire item H26, which was asked at owneroccupied mobile homes and boats.

These data include the total yearly costs for personal

property taxes, land or site rent, marina fees or ship rent,

registration fees, and license fees on all owner-occupied

mobile homes and boats. The instructions are to not

include taxes already reported in question H21.

Costs are estimated as closely as possible when exact

costs are not known. Amounts are the total for an entire

12-month billing period, even if they are paid by someone

outside the household or remain unpaid.

The data from this item are added to payments for

mortgages, real estate taxes, fire, hazard, and flood insurance payments, utilities, and fuels to derive selected

monthly owner costs for mobile home and boat occupants.

Comparability—This item is new for 1990.

MORTGAGE PAYMENT

The data on mortgage payment were obtained from

questionnaire item H23b, which was asked at owner

occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and

B–34 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 35 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

mobile homes. Question H23b provides the regular monthly

amount required to be paid the lender for the first mortgage

(deed of trust, contract to purchase, or similar debt) on the

property. Amounts are included even if the payments are

delinquent or paid by someone else. The amounts reported

are included in the computation of ‘‘Selected Monthly

Owner Costs’’ and ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a

Percentage of Household Income in 1989’’ for units with a

mortgage.

The amounts reported include everything paid to the

lender including principal and interest payments, real estate

taxes, fire, hazard, and flood insurance payments, and

mortgage insurance premiums. Separate questions determine whether real estate taxes and fire, hazard, and flood

insurance payments are included in the mortgage payment

to the lender. This makes it possible to avoid counting

these components twice in the computation of ‘‘Selected

Monthly Owner Costs.’’

Comparability—Information on mortgage payment was

collected for the first time in 1980. It was collected only at

owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile

homes, condominiums, houses with a business or medical

office on the property, one-family houses on 10 or more

acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the

questions on monthly mortgage payments were asked of

all owner-occupied one-family houses, including one-family

houses on 10 or more acres. They were also asked at

mobile homes, condominiums, boats, and one-family houses

with a business or medical office.

The 1980 census obtained total regular monthly mortgage payments, including payments on second or junior

mortgages, from a single question. Two questions were

used in 1990; one for regular monthly payments on first

mortgages, and one for regular monthly payments on

second or junior mortgages or home equity loans. (For

more information, see the discussion under ‘‘Second or

Junior Mortgage Payment.’’)

MORTGAGE STATUS

The data on mortgage status were obtained from questionnaire items H23a and H24a, which were asked at

owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats,

and mobile homes. ‘‘Mortgage’’ refers to all forms of debt

where the property is pledged as security for repayment of

the debt. It includes such debt instruments as deeds of

trust, trust deeds, contracts to purchase, land contracts,

junior mortgages and home equity loans.

A mortgage is considered a first mortgage if it has prior

claim over any other mortgage or if it is the only mortgage

on the property. All other mortgages, (second, third, etc.)

are considered junior mortgages. A home equity loan is

generally a junior mortgage. If no first mortgage is reported,

but a junior mortgage or home equity loan is reported, then

the loan is considered a first mortgage.

In most census data products, the tabulations for ‘‘Selected

Monthly Owner Costs’’ and ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner

Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989’’

usually are shown separately for units ‘‘with a mortgage’’

and for units ‘‘not mortgaged.’’ The category ‘‘not mortgaged’’ is comprised of housing units owned free and clear

of debt.

Comparability—The item was asked for the first time in

1980. In 1980, the mortgage status questions were asked

at owner-occupied one-family houses on less than 3 acres.

Excluded were mobile homes, boats, condominiums, houses

with a business or medical office, houses on 3 or more

acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the

questions were asked of all one-family owner-occupied

housing units, including houses on 10 or more acres. They

were also asked at mobile homes, boats, condominiums,

and houses with a business or medical office.

PERSONS IN UNIT

This item is based on the 100-percent count of persons

in occupied housing units. All persons occupying the

housing unit are counted, including the householder, occupants related to the householder, and lodgers, roomers,

boarders, and so forth.

The data on ‘‘persons in unit’’ show the number of

housing units occupied by the specified number of persons. The phrase ‘‘persons in unit’’ is used for housing

tabulations, ‘‘persons in households’’ for population items.

Figures for ‘‘persons in unit’’ match those for ‘‘persons in

household.’’

Median Persons in Unit—In computing median persons

in unit, a whole number is used as the midpoint of an

interval; thus, a unit with 4 persons is treated as an interval

ranging from 3.5 to 4.5 persons. Median persons is rounded

to the nearest hundredth. (For more information on medians, see the discussion under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Persons in Occupied Housing Units—This is the total

population minus those persons living in group quarters.

‘‘Persons per occupied housing unit’’ is computed by

dividing the population living in housing units by the

number of occupied housing units.

PERSONS PER ROOM

‘‘Persons per room’’ is obtained by dividing the number

of persons in each occupied housing unit by the number of

rooms in the unit. Persons per room is rounded to the

nearest hundredth. The figures shown refer, therefore, to

the number of occupied housing units having the specified

ratio of persons per room.

Mean Persons Per Room—This is computed by dividing

persons in housing units by the aggregate number of

rooms. This is intended to provide a measure of utilization.

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–35
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 36 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

A higher mean may indicate a greater degree of utilization

or crowding; a low mean may indicate under-utilization.

(For more information on means, see the discussion under

‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

PLUMBING FACILITIES

The data on plumbing facilities were obtained from

questionnaire item H10, which was asked at both occupied

and vacant housing units. Complete plumbing facilities

include hot and cold piped water, a flush toilet, and a

bathtub or shower. All three facilities must be located

inside the house, apartment, or mobile home, but not

necessarily in the same room. Housing units are classified

as lacking complete plumbing facilities when any of the

three facilities are not present.

Comparability—The 1990 data on complete plumbing

facilities are not strictly comparable with the 1980 data. In

1980, complete plumbing facilities were defined as hot and

cold piped water, a bathtub or shower, and a flush toilet in

the housing unit for the exclusive use of the residents of

that unit. In 1990, the Census Bureau dropped the requirement of exclusive use from the definition of complete

plumbing facilities. From 1940 to 1970, separate and more

detailed questions were asked on piped water, bathing,

and toilet facilities. In 1970 and 1980, the data on plumbing

facilities were shown only for year-round housing units.

POVERTY STATUS OF HOUSEHOLDS IN 1989

The data on poverty status of households were derived

from answers to the income questions. Households are

classified below the poverty level when the total 1989

income of the family or of the nonfamily householder is

below the appropriate poverty threshold. The income of

persons living in the household who are unrelated to the

householder is not considered when determining the poverty status of a household, nor does their presence affect

the household size in determining the appropriate poverty

threshold. The poverty thresholds vary depending upon

three criteria: size of family, number of children, and age of

the family householder or unrelated individual for one and

two-persons households. (For more information, see the

discussion of ‘‘Poverty Status in 1989’’ and ‘‘Income in

1989’’ under Population Characteristics.)

REAL ESTATE TAXES

The data on real estate taxes were obtained from

questionnaire item H21, which was asked at owner-occupied

one-family houses, condominiums, and mobile homes. The

statistics from this question refer to the total amount of all

real estate taxes on the entire property (land and buildings)

payable in 1989 to all taxing jurisdictions, including special

assessments, school taxes, county taxes, and so forth.

Real estate taxes include State, local, and all other real

estate taxes even if delinquent, unpaid, or paid by someone who is not a member of the household. However,

taxes due from prior years are not included. If taxes are

paid on other than a yearly basis, the payments are

converted to a yearly basis.

The payment for real estate taxes is added to payments

for fire, hazard, and flood insurance; utilities and fuels; and

mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home

equity loans) to derive ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs’’

and ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of

Household Income in 1989.’’ A separate question (H23c)

determines whether real estate taxes are included in the

mortgage payment to the lender(s). This makes it possible

to avoid counting taxes twice in the computations.

Comparability—Data for real estate taxes were collected

for the first time in 1980. The question was asked only at

owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile

homes or trailers, condominiums, houses with a business

or medical office on the property, houses on 3 or more

acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the

question was asked of all one-family owner-occupied

houses, including houses on 10 or more acres. It also was

asked at mobile homes, condominiums, and one-family

houses with a business or medical office on the property.

ROOMS

The data on rooms were obtained from questionnaire

item H3, which was asked at both occupied and vacant

housing units. The statistics on rooms are in terms of the

number of housing units with a specified number of rooms.

The intent of this question is to count the number of whole

rooms used for living purposes.

For each unit, rooms include living rooms, dining rooms,

kitchens, bedrooms, finished recreation rooms, enclosed

porches suitable for year-round use, and lodger’s rooms.

Excluded are strip or pullman kitchens, bathrooms, open

porches, balconies, halls or foyers, half-rooms, utility rooms,

unfinished attics or basements, or other unfinished space

used for storage. A partially divided room is a separate

room only if there is a partition from floor to ceiling, but not

if the partition consists solely of shelves or cabinets.

Median Rooms—This measure divides the room distribution into two equal parts, one-half of the cases falling

below the median number of rooms and one-half above

the median. In computing median rooms, the whole number is used as the midpoint of the interval; thus, the

category ‘‘3 rooms’’ is treated as an interval ranging from

2.5 to 3.5 rooms. Median rooms is rounded to the nearest

tenth. (For more information on medians, see the discussion under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Aggregate Rooms—To calculate aggregate rooms, an

arbitrary value of ‘‘10’’ is assigned to rooms for units falling

within the terminal category, ‘‘9 or more.’’ (For more

information on aggregates and means, see the discussion

under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

B–36 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 37 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

Comparability—Data on rooms have been collected since

1940. In 1970 and 1980, these data were shown only for

year-round housing units. In 1990, these data are shown

for all housing units.

SECOND OR JUNIOR MORTGAGE PAYMENT

The data on second or junior mortgage payments were

obtained from questionnaire items H24a and H24b, which

were asked at owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and mobile homes. Question H24a asks

whether a second or junior mortgage or a home equity loan

exists on the property. Question H24b provides the regular

monthly amount required to be paid to the lender on all

second or junior mortgages and home equity loans. Amounts

are included even if the payments are delinquent or paid by

someone else. The amounts reported are included in the

computation of ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs’’ and

‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989’’ for units with a mortgage.

All mortgages other than first mortgages are classified

as ‘‘junior’’ mortgages. A second mortgage is a junior

mortgage that gives the lender a claim against the property

that is second to the claim of the holder of the first

mortgage. Any other junior mortgage(s) would be subordinate to the second mortgage. A home equity loan is a line

of credit available to the borrower that is secured by real

estate. It may be placed on a property that already has a

first or second mortgage, or it may be placed on a property

that is owned free and clear.

If the respondents answered that no first mortgage

existed, but a second mortgage did (as in the above case

with a home equity loan), a computer edit assigned the unit

a first mortgage and made the first mortgage monthly

payment the amount reported in the second mortgage.

The second mortgage data were then made ‘‘No’’ in

question H24a and blank in question H24b.

Comparability—The 1980 census obtained total regular

monthly mortgage payments, including payments on second or junior mortgages, from one single question. Two

questions were used in 1990: one for regular monthly

payments on first mortgages, and one for regular monthly

payments on second or junior mortgages and home equity

loans.

SELECTED MONTHLY OWNER COSTS

The data on selected monthly owner costs were obtained

from questionnaire items H20 through H26 for owneroccupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and

mobile homes. Selected monthly owner costs is the sum of

payments for mortgages, deeds of trust, contracts to

purchase, or similar debts on the property (including

payments for the first mortgage, second or junior mortgages, and home equity loans); real estate taxes; fire,

hazard, and flood insurance on the property; utilities (electricity, gas, and water); and fuels (oil, coal, kerosene, wood,

etc.). It also includes, where appropriate, the monthly

condominium fee for condominiums, and boat and mobile

home costs such as personal property taxes, site rent,

registration fees, and license fees.

In certain tabulations, selected monthly owner costs are

presented separately for specified owner-occupied housing units (owner-occupied one-family houses on fewer

than 10 acres without a business or medical office on the

property),owner-occupied condominiums,and owner-occupied

mobile homes. Data usually are shown separately for units

‘‘with a mortgage’’ and for units ‘‘not mortgaged.’’

Median Selected Monthly Owner Costs—This measure

is rounded to the nearest whole dollar.

Comparability—The components of selected monthly owner

costs were collected for the first time in 1980. The 1990

tabulations of selected monthly owner costs for specified

owner-occupied housing units are virtually identical to

1980, the primary difference was the amounts of the first

and second mortgages were collected in separate questions in 1990, while the amounts were collected in a single

question in 1980. The component parts of the item were

tabulated for boats, mobile homes, and condominiums for

the first time in 1990. In 1980 and 1990, costs for electricity

and gas were collected as average monthly costs.

SELECTED MONTHLY OWNER COSTS AS A

PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD INCOME IN

1989

The information on selected monthly owner costs as a

percentage of household income in 1989 is the computed

ratio of selected monthly owner costs to monthly household income in 1989. The ratio was computed separately

for each unit and rounded to the nearest whole percentage. The data are tabulated separately for specified owneroccupied units, condominiums, boats, and mobile homes.

Separate distributions are often shown for units ‘‘with a

mortgage’’ and for units ‘‘not mortgaged.’’ Units occupied

by households reporting no income or a net loss in 1989

are included in the ‘‘not computed’’ category. (For more

information, see the discussion under ‘‘Selected Monthly

Owner Costs.’’)

Comparability—The components of selected monthly owner

costs were collected for the first time in 1980. The tabulations of ‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage

of Household Income in 1989’’ for specified owner-occupied

housing units are comparable to 1980.

SEWAGE DISPOSAL

The data on sewage disposal were obtained from

questionnaire item H16, which was asked at both occupied

and vacant housing units. Housing units are either connected to a public sewer, to a septic tank or cesspool, or

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–37
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 38 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

they dispose of sewage by other means. A public sewer

may be operated by a government body or by a private

organization. A housing unit is considered to be connected

to a septic tank or cesspool when the unit is provided with

an underground pit or tank for sewage disposal. The

category, ‘‘Other means’’ includes housing units which

dispose of sewage in some other way.

Comparability—Data on sewage disposal have been collected since 1940. In 1970 and 1980, data were shown

only for year-round housing units. In 1990, data are shown

for all housing units.

SOURCE OF WATER

The data on source of water were obtained from questionnaire items H15a and H15b, which were asked at both

occupied and vacant housing units. Housing units may

receive their water supply from a number of sources. A

common source supplying water to five or more units is

classified as ‘‘a public system only’’ or ‘‘a public system

and cistern.’’ Another source of water may be ‘‘a cistern,

tanks, or drums only’’ in which rain water is collected. ‘‘A

public standpipe’’ is an elevated tank or vertical storage

cylinder or street hydrant which is connected to a public

system from which nearby residents draw water. The

category ‘‘some other source such as an individual well or

a spring’’ includes water obtained from creeks, rivers,

lakes, etc.

Purchase of water from water vendor—Households

were asked whether or not water was purchased from a

water vendor from January through December 1989. Households are considered to have purchased water from a

water vendor, even if only one purchase was made during

the year; and even though their primary source of water is

from a public system, and public standpipe, or some other

source. Bottled water purchased from a commercial establishment such as a grocery store or drugstore is not

included.

Comparability—Data on source of water have been collected in every census since 1940. In 1970 and 1980, data

were shown only for year-round housing units.

TELEPHONE IN HOUSING UNIT

The data on telephones were obtained from questionnaire item H12, which was asked at occupied housing

units. A telephone must be inside the house or apartment

for the unit to be classified as having a telephone. Units

where the respondent uses a telephone located inside the

building but not in the respondent’s living quarters are

classified as having no telephone.

Comparability—This is a new item in 1990.

TENURE

The data for tenure were obtained from questionnaire

item H4, which was asked at all occupied housing units. All

occupied housing units are classified as either owner

occupied or renter occupied.

Owner Occupied—A housing unit is owner occupied if the

owner or co-owner lives in the unit even if it is mortgaged

or not fully paid for. The owner or co-owner must live in the

unit and usually is the person listed in column 1 of the

questionnaire. The unit is ‘‘Owned by you or someone in

this household with a mortgage or loan’’ if it is being

purchased with a mortgage or some other debt arrangement such as a deed of trust, trust deed, contract to

purchase, land contract, or purchase agreement. The unit

is also considered owned with a mortgage if it is built on

leased land and there is a mortgage on the unit.

A housing unit is ‘‘Owned by you or someone in this

household free and clear (without a mortgage)’’ if there is

no mortgage or other similar debt on the house, apartment,

or mobile home including units built on leased land if the

unit is owned outright without a mortgage. Although owneroccupied housing units are divided between mortgaged

and owned free and clear on the questionnaire, census

data products containing 100-percent data show only total

owner-occupied counts. More extensive mortgage information was collected on the long-form questionnaire and are

shown in census products containing sample data.

Renter Occupied—All occupied housing units which are

not owner occupied, whether they are rented for cash rent

or occupied without payment of cash rent, are classified as

renter occupied. ‘‘No cash rent’’ units are separately

identified in the rent tabulations. Such units are generally

provided free by friends or relatives or in exchange for

services such as a resident manager, caretaker, minister,

or tenant farmer. Housing units on military bases also are

classified in the ‘‘No cash rent’’ category.

‘‘Rented for cash rent’’ includes units in continuing care,

sometimes called life care arrangements. These arrangements usually involve a contract between one or more

individuals and a health services provider guaranteeing the

individual shelter, usually a house or apartment, and

services, such as meals or transportation to shopping or

recreation.

Comparability—Data on tenure have been collected for

the Virgin Islands since 1930. In 1970, the question on

tenure also included a category for condominium and

cooperative ownership. In 1980, condominium units and

cooperatives were dropped from the tenure item, and

since 1980, only condominium units are identified in a

separate question.

For 1990, the response categories were expanded to

allow the respondent to report whether the unit was owned

with a mortgage or free and clear (without a mortgage).

The distinction between units owned with a mortgage and

B–38 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 39 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

units owned free and clear was added in 1990 to improve

the count of owner-occupied units. Research after the

1980 census indicated some respondents did not consider

their units owned if they had a mortgage.

UNITS IN STRUCTURE

The data on units in structure (also referred to as ‘‘type

of structure’’) were obtained from questionnaire item H2,

which was asked at all housing units. A structure is a

separate building that either has open spaces on all sides

or is separated from other structures by dividing walls that

extend from ground to roof. In determining the number of

units in a structure, all housing units, both occupied and

vacant, are counted. Stores or office space are excluded.

The statistics are presented for the number of housing

units in structures of specified type and size, not for the

number of residential buildings.

1-Unit, Detached—This is a 1-unit structure detached

from any other structure; that is, with open space on all

four sides. Such structures are considered detached even

if they have an adjoining shed or garage. A one-family

house which contains a business is considered detached

as long as the building has open space on all four sides.

Mobile homes or trailers to which one or more permanent

rooms have been added or built are also included.

1-Unit, Attached—This is a 1-unit structure which has one

or more walls extending from ground to roof separating it

from adjoining structures. In row houses (sometimes called

townhouses), double houses, or houses attached to nonresidential structures, each house is a separate, attached

structure if the dividing or common wall goes from ground

to roof.

2 or More Units—These are units in structures containing

2 or more housing units, further categorized as units in

structures with 2, 3 or 4, 5 to 9, 10 to 19, and 20 or more

units.

Mobile Home or Trailer—Both occupied and vacant

mobile homes to which no permanent rooms have been

added are counted in this category. Mobile homes or

trailers used only for business purposes or for extra

sleeping space and mobile homes or trailers for sale on a

dealer’s lot, or in storage are not counted in the housing

inventory.

Boat or Houseboat—Included in this category are boats

and houseboats that are occupied as housing units.

Other—This category is for any living quarters occupied as

a housing unit that does not fit the previous categories.

Examples that fit this category are abandoned cars, tents,

campers, and vans.

Comparability—Data on units in structure have been

collected for the Virgin Islands since 1940, on mobile

homes and trailers since 1950, and on boats since 1980. In

1970 and 1980, these data were shown only for year-round

housing units. In 1990, these data are shown for all

housing units. The category, ‘‘Tent, van, etc.’’ was replaced

in 1990 by the category, ‘‘Other.’’

USUAL HOME ELSEWHERE

The data for usual home elsewhere were obtained from

questionnaire item E, which was completed by census

employees. A housing unit temporarily occupied at the

time of enumeration entirely by persons with a usual

residence elsewhere is classified as vacant. The occupants are classified as having a ‘‘Usual home elsewhere’’

and are counted at the address of their usual place of

residence. Typical examples are people in a vacation

home and persons renting living quarters temporarily for

work.

Limitation of the Data—Evidence from previous censuses suggests that in some areas enumerators marked

units as ‘‘vacant—usual home elsewhere’’ when they

should have marked ‘‘vacant—regular.’’

Comparability—Data for usual home elsewhere were

tabulated for the first time in 1980.

UTILITIES

The data on utility costs were obtained from questionnaire items H20a through H20d, which were asked at all

occupied housing units.

Questions H20a through H20d asked for the monthly

cost of utilities (electricity, gas, water) and other fuels (oil,

coal, wood, kerosene, etc.). The average monthly costs

are included in the computation of ‘‘Gross Rent,’’ ‘‘Gross

Rent as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989,’’

‘‘Selected Monthly Owner Costs,’’ and ‘‘Selected Monthly

Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in

1989.’’

Costs are recorded if paid by or billed to occupants, a

welfare agency, relatives, or friends. Costs that are paid by

landlords, included in the rent payment, or included in

condominium or cooperative fees are excluded.

Limitation of the Data—Research has shown that respondents tended to overstate their expenses for electricity and

gas when compared to utility company records.

Comparability—Data on utilities were collected for the

first time in 1980.

VACANCY STATUS

The data on vacancy status were obtained from questionnaire item C1, which was completed by census enumerators. Vacancy status and other characteristics of

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–39
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 40 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

vacant units were determined by enumerators obtaining

information from landlords, owners, neighbors, rental agents,

and others. Vacant units are subdivided according to their

housing market classification as follows:

For Rent—These are vacant units offered ‘‘for rent’’ and

vacant units offered either ‘‘for rent or for sale.’’

For Sale Only—These are vacant units being offered

‘‘for sale only,’’ including units in cooperatives and

condominium projects if the individual units are offered

‘‘for sale only.’’

Rented or Sold, Not Occupied—If any money rent has

been paid or agreed upon but the new renter has not

moved in as of the date of enumeration, or if the unit has

recently been sold but the new owner has not yet

moved in, the vacant unit is classified as ‘‘rented or sold,

not occupied.’’

For Seasonal, Recreational, or Occasional Use—These

are vacant units used or intended for use only in certain

seasons or for weekend or other occasional use throughout the year. Seasonal units include those used for

summer or winter sports or recreation, such as beach

cottages and hunting cabins. Seasonal units may also

include quarters for such workers as herders and loggers. Interval ownership units, sometimes called shared

ownership or time-sharing condominiums, also are included

here.

Other Vacant—If a vacant unit does not fall into any of

the classifications specified above, it is classified as

‘‘other vacant.’’ For example, this category includes

units held for occupancy by a caretaker or janitor, and

units held for personal reasons of the owner.

Homeowner Vacancy Rate—This is the percentage relationship between the number of vacant units for sale and

the total homeowner inventory. It is computed by dividing

the number of vacant units for sale only by the sum of the

owner-occupied units and the number of vacant units that

are for sale only.

Rental Vacancy Rate—This is the percentage relationship of the number of vacant units for rent to the total

rental inventory. It is computed by dividing the number of

vacant units for rent by the sum of the renter-occupied

units and the number of vacant units for rent.

Comparability—Data on vacancy status have been collected since 1940. For 1990, the category, ‘‘seasonal/ recreational/ occasional use’’ combined vacant units classified in 1980 as ‘‘seasonal’’ and ‘‘held for occasional use.’’

Also, in 1970 and 1980, housing characteristics were

generally presented only for year-round units. In 1990,

housing characteristics are shown for all housing units.

VALUE

The data on value (also referred to as ‘‘price asked’’ for

vacant units) were obtained from questionnaire item H6,

which was asked at housing units that were owned, being

bought, or vacant for sale at the time of enumeration.

Value is the respondent’s estimate of how much the

property (house and lot, mobile home and lot, or condominium unit) would sell for if it were for sale. If the house or

mobile home is owned or being bought, but the land on

which it sits is not, the respondent was asked to estimate

the combined value of the house or mobile home and the

land. For vacant units, value is the price asked for the

property.

Value is tabulated separately for all owner-occupied and

vacant-for-sale-only housing units, owner-occupied and

vacant-for-sale mobile homes or trailers, and specified

owner-occupied and specified vacant-for-sale-only housing units. Specified owner-occupied and specified vacantfor-sale-only housing units include only one-family houses

on less than 10 acres without a business or medical office

on the property. The data for ‘‘specified’’ units exclude

mobile homes, houses with a business or medical office,

houses on 10 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit

buildings.

Median and Quartile Value—The median divides the

value distribution into two equal parts. Quartiles divide the

value distribution into four equal parts. These measures

are rounded to the nearest hundred dollars. (For more

information on medians and quartiles, see the discussion

under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Aggregate Value—To calculate aggregate value, the amount

assigned for the category ‘‘Less than $10,000’’ is $9,000.

The amount assigned to the category ‘‘$500,000 or more’’

is $600,000. Mean value is rounded to the nearest hundred

dollars. (For more information on aggregates and means,

see the discussion under ‘‘Derived Measures.’’)

Comparability—In 1980, value was asked only at owneroccupied or vacant-for-sale one-family houses on less

than 3 acres with no business or medical office on the

property and at all owner-occupied or vacant-for-sale

condominium housing units. Mobile homes were excluded.

Value data were presented for specified owner-occupied

housing units, specified vacant-for-sale-only housing units,

and owner-occupied condominium housing units.

In 1990, the question was asked at all owner-occupied

or vacant-for-sale-only housing units with no exclusions.

Data presented for specified owner-occupied and specified vacant-for-sale-only housing units will include onefamily condominium houses.

For 1990, quartiles have been added because the range

of values and rents in the Virgin Islands has increased in

recent years. Upper and lower quartiles can be used to

note large value and rent differences among various

geographic areas.

B–40 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 41 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

VEHICLES AVAILABLE

The data on vehicles available were obtained from

questionnaire item H13, which was asked at occupied

housing units. These data show the number of households

with a specified number of passenger cars, vans, and

pickup or panel trucks of one-ton capacity or less kept at

home and available for the use of household members.

Vehicles rented or leased for one month or more, company

vehicles, and police and government vehicles are included

if kept at home and used for nonbusiness purposes.

Dismantled or immobile vehicles are excluded. Vehicles

kept at home but used only for business purposes also are

excluded.

Vehicles Per Household—This is computed by dividing

aggregate vehicles available by the number of occupied

housing units.

Comparability—Data on automobiles available were collected for the first time in 1980.

YEAR HOUSEHOLDER MOVED INTO UNIT

The data on year householder moved into unit were

obtained from questionnaire item H8, which was asked at

occupied housing units. These data refer to the year of the

latest move by the householder. If a householder moved

back into a housing unit he or she previously occupied, the

year of the latest move was reported. If the householder

moved from one apartment to another within the same

building, the year the householder moved into the present

apartment was reported. The intent is to establish the year

the present occupancy by the householder began. The

year that the householder moved in is not necessarily the

same year other members of the household moved, although

in the great majority of cases an entire household moves at

the same time.

Comparability—In 1960 and 1970, this question was

asked of every person and included in population reports.

This item in housing tabulations refers to the year the

householder moved in. In 1980 and 1990, the question

was asked only of the householder.

YEAR STRUCTURE BUILT

The data on year structure built were obtained from

questionnaire item H17, which was asked at both occupied

and vacant housing units. Data on year structure built refer

to when the building was first constructed, not when it was

remodeled, added to, or converted. For housing units

under construction that met the housing unit definition—that

is, all exterior windows, doors, and final usable floors were

in place—the category ‘‘1989 or March 1990’’ was used.

For a houseboat or a mobile home or trailer, the manufacturer’s model year was assumed to be the year built. The

figures shown in census data products relate to the

number of units built during the specified periods that were

still in existence at the time of enumeration.

Median Year Structure Built—The median divides the

distribution into two equal parts. The median is rounded to

the nearest calendar year. Median age of housing can be

obtained by subtracting median year structure built from

1990. For example, if the median year structure built is

1957, the median age of housing in that area is 33 years

(1990 minus 1957).

Limitation of the Data—Data on year structure built are

more susceptible to errors of response and nonreporting

than data on many other items because respondents must

rely on their memory or on estimates by persons who have

lived in the neighborhood a long time. Available evidence

indicates there is underreporting in the older-year-structurebuilt categories, especially ‘‘Built in 1939 or earlier.’’ The

introduction of the ‘‘Don’t know’’ category (see the discussion on ‘‘Comparability’’) may have resulted in relatively

higher allocation rates. Data users should refer to the

discussion in Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data, and to the

allocation tables.

Comparability—Data on year structure built were collected for the first time in the 1940 census. Since then, the

response categories have been modified to accommodate

the 10-year period between each census. In 1990, the

category, ‘‘Don’t Know,’’ was added in an effort to minimize the response error mentioned in the paragraph above

on limitation of the data.

DERIVED MEASURES

Census data products include various derived measures, such as medians, means, and percentages, as well

as certain rates and ratios. Derived measures that round to

less than 0.1 are not shown but indicated as zero. In

printed reports, zero is indicated by a dash (–).

Interpolation

Interpolation frequently is used in calculating medians

or quartiles based on interval data and in approximating

standard errors from tables. Linear interpolation is used to

estimate values of a function between two known values.

‘‘Pareto interpolation’’ is an alternative to linear interpolation. It is used by the Census Bureau in calculating median

income within intervals wider than $2,500. In Pareto interpolation, the median is derived by interpolating between

the logarithms of the upper and lower income limits of the

median category.

Mean

This measure represents an arithmetic average of a set

of values. It is derived by dividing the sum of a group of

numerical items (or aggregate) by the total number of

DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B–41
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 42 SESS: 194 OUTPUT: Thu Mar 18 11:43:28 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ cph35/ 55/ appb

items. Aggregates are used in computing mean values. For

example, mean family income is obtained by dividing the

aggregate of all income reported by persons in families by

the total number of families. (Additional information on

means and aggregates is included in the separate explanations of many population and housing subjects.)

Median

This measure represents the middle value in a distribution. The median divides the total frequency into two equal

parts: one-half of the cases fall below the median and

one-half of the cases exceed the median. The median is

computed on the basis of the distribution as tabulated,

which is sometimes more detailed than the distribution

shown in specific census publications and other data

products.

In reports, if the median falls within the upper interval of

the tabulation distribution, the median is shown as the

initial value of the interval followed by a plus sign (+ ); if

within the lower interval, the median is shown as the upper

value of the category followed by a minus sign (–). For

summary tape files, if the median falls within the upper or

lower interval, it is set to a specified value. (Additional

information on medians is included in the separate explanations of many population and housing subjects.)

Percentages, Rates, and Ratios

These measures are frequently presented in census

products to compare two numbers or two sets of measurements. These comparisons are made in two ways: (1)

subtraction, which provides an absolute measure of the

difference between two items, and (2) the quotient of two

numbers, which provides a relative measure of difference.

Quartile

This measure divides a distribution into four equal parts.

The first quartile (or lower quartile) is the value that defines

the upper limit of the lowest one-quarter of the cases. The

second quartile is the median. The third quartile (or upper

quartile) defines the lower limit of the upper one-quarter of

the cases in the distribution. The difference between the

upper and lower quartiles is called the interquartile range.

This interquartile range is less affected by wide variations

than is the mean. Quartiles are presented for certain

financial characteristics such as housing value and rent.

B–42 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:23 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appc

APPENDIX C.

Accuracy of the Data

CONTENTS

Confidentiality of the Data --------------------------------- C–1

Editing of Unacceptable Data------------------------------- C–1

Sources of Error------------------------------------------- C–2

CONFIDENTIALITY OF THE DATA

To maintain confidentiality as required by law (Title 13,

United States Code), the Bureau of the Census applies a

confidentiality edit to the 1990 census data to ensure that

published data do not disclose information about specific

individuals, households, and housing units. As a result, a

small amount of uncertainty is introduced into some of the

census characteristics to prevent identification of specific

individuals, households, or housing units. The confidentiality edit is controlled so that the counts of total persons,

totals by race, Hispanic origin, and persons age 18 years

and over are not affected. In addition, total counts for

housing units by tenure are not affected by this edit.

The confidentiality edit for the Virgin Islands of the

United States (Virgin Islands) was conducted in basically

the same way for each of the two types of data (stateside

100-percent equivalent data and stateside sample equivalent data) that were collected from everyone in the Virgin

Islands. In the United States census, certain information

(referred to as stateside 100-percent data) was collected

from everyone, and some additional information (referred

to as stateside sample data) was collected from about a

1-in-6 sample of the population. In the Virgin Islands, all of

the census information was collected on a 100-percent

basis. The Virgin Islands basic (stateside 100-percent

equivalent) data corresponds to the United States census

100-percent data and includes age, sex, race, Hispanic

origin, relationship, marital status, and certain questions

concerning the housing unit (e.g., value, rent, and number

of rooms). The Virgin Islands detailed (stateside sample

equivalent) data corresponds to the United States census

sample data and includes questions on such subjects as

income, water source, language usage, and journey to

work.

The confidentiality edit for the Virgin Islands was conducted by selecting a sample of census households from

the internal census files and blanking and imputing a

random subset of either its 100-percent equivalent data or

its sample equivalent data from other households that

have identical characteristics on a set of selected key

variables, but are in different geographic locations within

the Virgin Islands. To provide more protection for ‘‘small

areas,’’ a higher sampling rate was used for these areas.

The net result of this procedure is that the data user’s

ability to obtain census data, particularly for small areas

and subpopulation groups, has been enhanced significantly while maintaining confidentiality of individual responses.

EDITING OF UNACCEPTABLE DATA

The objective of the processing operation is to produce

a set of data that describes the population as clearly and

accurately as possible. To meet this objective, questionnaires were reviewed and edited during field data collection operations by crew leaders for consistency, completeness, and acceptability. Questionnaires were also reviewed

by census clerks in the district offices for omissions,

certain inconsistencies, and population coverage. For example, write-in entries such as ‘‘Don’t know’’ or ‘‘NA’’ were

considered unacceptable in certain quantities and/ or in

conjunction with other data omissions.

As a result of this review operation, a telephone or

personal visit follow-up was made to obtain missing information. Potential coverage errors were included in the

followup, as well as questionnaires with omissions or

inconsistencies beyond the completeness and quality tolerances specified in the review procedures.

Subsequent to field operations, remaining incomplete or

inconsistent information on the questionnaires was assigned

using imputation procedures during the final automated

edit of the collected data. Allocations, or computer assignments of acceptable data in place of unacceptable entries

or blanks, are needed most often when an entry for a given

item is lacking or when the information reported for a

person or housing unit on that item is inconsistent with

other information for that same person or housing unit. As

in previous censuses, the general procedure for changing

unacceptable entries was to assign an entry for a person

or housing unit that was consistent with entries for persons

or housing units with similar characteristics. The assignment of acceptable data in place of blanks or unacceptable entries enhances the usefulness of the data.

Another way in which corrections were made during the

computer editing process was through substitution; that is,

the assignment of a full set of characteristics for a person

or housing unit. For example, when there was an indication

that a housing unit was occupied but the questionnaire

contained no information for the people within the household or the occupants were not listed on the questionnaire,

a previously accepted household was selected as a substitute, and the full set of characteristics for the substitute

was duplicated for the person(s) and/ or housing unit

without characteristic data. The assignment of the full set

ACCURACY OF THE DATA C–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:23 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appc

of housing characteristics occurred when no housing information was available. If the housing unit was determined to

be occupied, the housing and person characteristics as

well as the number of persons were assigned from a

previously processed occupied unit. If the housing unit was

vacant, the housing characteristics were assigned from a

previously processed vacant unit.

SOURCES OF ERROR

In any large-scale statistical operation, such as the 1990

decennial census, human- and machine-related errors

occur. These errors are commonly referred to as nonsampling errors. Such errors include not enumerating every

household or every person in the population, not obtaining

all required information from the respondents, obtaining

incorrect or inconsistent information, and recording information incorrectly. In addition, errors can occur during the

field review of the enumerators’ work, during clerical

handling of the census questionnaires, or during the electronic processing of the questionnaires.

To reduce various types of nonsampling errors, a number of techniques were implemented during the planning,

data collection, and data processing activities. Quality

assurance methods were used throughout the data

collection and processing phases of the census to improve

the quality of the data.

Several coverage improvement programs were implemented during the development of the census enumeration and processing to minimize undercoverage of the

population and housing units. These programs were developed based on experience from the 1980 decennial census and results from the 1990 United States decennial

census testing cycle.

A quality assurance program, designed to improve

coverage, began with an advance listing of addresses.

Advance listers collected addresses and recorded map

spots for six housing units in each of two sample blocks in

every enumerator assignment area or address register

area. The quality assurance check consisted of matching

the advance listed address and map spots to the enumerator’s complete address register area listing. If the number

of nonmatches exceeded a predetermined level, then a

recheck of the address register area was required.

Telephone and personal visit followups also contributed

to improve coverage. The governor of the Virgin Islands

established a committee which reviewed the census tallies, and census enumerators conducted additional recanvassing. Computer and clerical edits were aimed at improving the quality and consistency of the data.

C–2 ACCURACY OF THE DATA
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 11 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:04:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appd

APPENDIX D.

Collection and Processing Procedures

CONTENTS

Data Collection Procedures -------------------------------- D–2

Enumeration and Residence Rules-------------------------- D–1

Processing Procedures ------------------------------------ D–2

ENUMERATION AND RESIDENCE RULES

In accordance with census practice dating back to the

first decennial census of the Virgin Islands of the United

States (Virgin Islands) in 1930, each person was to be

enumerated as an inhabitant of his or her ‘‘usual residence’’ in the 1990 census. Usual residence is the place

where the person lives and sleeps most of the time or

considers to be his or her usual residence. This place is not

necessarily the same as the person’s legal residence or

voting residence. In the vast majority of cases, however,

the use of these different bases of classification would

produce substantially the same statistics, although there

might be appreciable differences for a few areas.

The implementation of this practice has resulted in the

establishment of rules for certain categories of persons

whose usual place of residence is not immediately apparent. Furthermore, this practice means that persons were

not always counted as residents of the place where they

happened to be staying on Census Day (April 1, 1990).

Enumeration Rules

Each person whose usual residence was in the Virgin

Islands was to be included in the census, without regard to

the person’s legal status or citizenship. As in previous

censuses, persons in the Virgin Islands specifically excluded

from the census were foreign travelers who had not

established a residence.

Persons with a usual residence outside the Virgin Islands

were not enumerated in the 1990 census of the Virgin

Islands. On the other hand, residents of the Virgin Islands

temporarily abroad were to be enumerated at their usual

residence in the Virgin Islands.

Residence Rules

Each person included in the census was to be counted

at his or her usual residence—the place where he or she

lives and sleeps most of the time or the place where the

person considers to be his or her usual home. If a person

had no usual residence, the person was to be counted

where he or she was staying on April 1, 1990.

Persons temporarily away from their usual residence,

whether in the Virgin Islands or abroad, on a vacation or on

a business trip, were counted at their usual residence.

Persons who occupied more than one residence during the

year were counted at the one they considered to be their

usual residence. Persons who moved on or near Census

Day were counted at the place they considered to be their

usual residence.

Persons in the U.S. Armed Forces—Members of the

U.S. Armed Forces were counted as residents of the area

in which the installation was located, either on the installation or in the surrounding community. Family members of

the U.S. Armed Forces personnel were counted where

they were living on Census Day (for example, with the U.S.

Armed Forces person or at another location).

Each United States Navy ship not deployed to the 6th or

7th Fleet was attributed to the geographic area that the

Department of the Navy designated as its homeport. If the

homeport included more than one geographic area, ships

berthed there on Census Day were assigned by the Bureau

of the Census to the geographic area in which the land

immediately adjacent to the dock or pier was actually

located. Ships attributed to the homeport, but not physically present and not deployed to the 6th or 7th Fleet, were

assigned to the geographic area named on the Department of the Navy’s homeport list. These rules also apply to

U.S. Coast Guard vessels.

Personnel assigned to each Coast Guard ship were

given the opportunity to report a residence off the ship.

Those who did report an off-ship residence in the communities surrounding the homeport were counted there; those

who did not were counted as residents of the ship.

Persons on U.S. Maritime Ships—Persons aboard U.S.

maritime ships who reported an off-ship residence were

counted at that residence. Those who did not were counted

as residents of the ship, and were attributed as follows:

1. The port where the ship was docked on Census Day,

if that port was in the Virgin Islands, the United States,

Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas.

2. The port of departure if the ship was at sea, provided

the port was in the Virgin Islands, the United States,

Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas.

3. The port of destination in the Virgin Islands, the United

States, Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas, if

the port of departure of a ship at sea was a foreign

port.

COLLECTION AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES D–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:04:48 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appd

4. The U.S. overseas population if the ship was docked

at a foreign port or at sea between foreign ports.

Persons Away at School—College students were counted

as residents of the area in which they were living while

attending college, as they have been since the 1950

census. Children in boarding schools below the college

level were counted at their parental home.

Persons in Institutions—Persons under formally authorized, supervised care or custody, such as in jails; juvenile

institutions; nursing, convalescent, and rest homes for the

aged and dependent; or homes, schools, hospitals, or

wards for the physically handicapped, mentally retarded,

or mentally ill, were counted at these places.

Persons Away From Their Usual Residence on Census

Day—In the Virgin Islands, Hurricane Hugo displaced

significant numbers of households from their usual place of

residence. If these persons reported a destroyed or damaged residence as their usual residence, they were counted

at that location rather than the temporary quarters where

they were staying.

Persons away from their usual residence were counted

by means of interviews with other members of their

families, resident managers, or neighbors.

DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES

The 1990 census of the Virgin Islands was conducted

using modified list/ enumerate procedures (formerly called

conventional or door-to-door enumeration).

Enumeration of Housing Units

Beginning in early May 1990, enumerators visited and

listed every housing unit in their assigned areas and

conducted a personal interview, asking the questions as

worded on the census questionnaire and recording the

answers. A single questionnaire contained all questions

asked of every person at every housing unit. This questionnaire contained both basic (stateside 100-percent equivalent) and detailed (stateside sample equivalent) population and housing questions. Only housing information was

obtained for vacant housing units.

Field Followup

Followup enumerators visited each address for which

questionnaires were missing to obtain a completed questionnaire. If a followup enumerator determined that the unit

was vacant on Census Day, regardless of the present

occupancy status, the enumerator obtained information

about the unit from a neighbor or other knowledgeable

source and filled out a questionnaire for that unit, completing specified items in the questionnaire for vacant units.

Coverage and Edit-Failure Followup—The enumerators

conducted an initial check of the questionnaires for completeness and consistency. The census office staff performed additional coverage and edit checks. Those households for which questionnaires did not meet specific quality

standards because of incomplete or inconsistent information were contacted by telephone or by personal visit to

obtain the missing information or rectify the inconsistencies.

Special Enumeration Procedures

Special procedures and questionnaires were used for

the enumeration of persons in group quarters, such as

college dormitories, nursing homes, prisons, military barracks, and ships. The questionnaires (Individual Census

Reports) included the same population questions as the

regular census questionnaire but did not include any

housing questions.

PROCESSING PROCEDURES

The Virgin Islands questionnaires were processed in a

section of the Census Bureau’s Jacksonville, Florida Processing Office, specifically set up for the processing of

keyable documents. The information supplied to the enumerator by the respondent was recorded by marking the

answers in the appropriate answer boxes and, in some

cases, entering a write-in response.

The data processing was performed in several stages.

All questionnaires passed through a check-in procedure

upon their arrival at the processing office. Selected written

entries on the questionnaire were coded clerically. The

coded information included written entries for industry and

occupation, migration, place of birth, place of work, race,

Hispanic origin, ancestry, language, and relationship. After

all coding operations were completed, the questionnaires

(including Individual Census Reports) were keyed and the

resulting file was sent to the Census Bureau headquarters

for editing and tabulating operations.

D–2 COLLECTION AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 13 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

APPENDIX E.

Facsimile of Questionnaire Pages

FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

E–2 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E–3
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

E–4 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E–5
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

E–6 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E–7
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

E–8 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 9 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Wed Sep 2 10:47:42 1992 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ 100pct/ 55/ appe

FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E–9
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 153 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

APPENDIX F.

Data Products and User Assistance

CONTENTS

Data Products --------------------------------------------- F–1

Geographic Products -------------------------------------- F–2

Other Census Bureau Resources --------------------------- F–4

Reference Materials --------------------------------------- F–3

Sources of Assistance ------------------------------------- F–4

The 1990 census data products for the Virgin Islands of

the United States (Virgin Islands) are being released during

1991-93 and are available in a variety of new and traditional media. The Census Bureau increased the product

options available to data users to meet a variety of

requirements and maximize the usefulness of the data. For

example, flexible diskettes for microcomputers are a new

data delivery medium for the Virgin Islands.

The Census Bureau also expanded services and sources

of assistance available to data users. For example, the

data center program has over 1,400 organizations (including several in the Virgin Islands) to provide data and

services to the public.

This appendix provides a detailed introduction to the

1990 census data products and related materials, such as

maps and reference publications. It concludes by describing sources of assistance and other Census Bureau data

available to the public.

DATA PRODUCTS

Printed reports and computer tape files traditionally are

the most widely used products. The Census Bureau also

offers some data on microfiche and flexible diskettes.

These various products are described in this section. For

information about prices and how to order, write or call

Customer Services. (See the ‘‘Sources of Assistance’’

section for the address and phone number.)

The data products present statistics about the subjects

covered in the 1990 census questionnaires for the Virgin

Islands. These subjects are listed in figure 1, page F–6.

Printed Reports

Printed reports are the most convenient and readily

available source of data for most census users. The

Census Bureau releases the reports for the Virgin Islands

in several series (see figure 2, page F–7) that are grouped

under three broad titles: 1990 Census of Population and

Housing (1990 CPH), 1990 Census of Population (1990

CP), and 1990 Census of Housing (1990 CH). In addition,

there are reports, not reflected in figure 2, for the United

States, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas (American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana

Islands, Guam, and the Republic of Palau). The reports are

sold by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office. (See the ‘‘Sources of Assistance’’

section for the address and phone number.)

The geographic coverage of the Virgin Islands reports is

listed in figure 2. Report series that present data for small

areas, such as block numbering areas, contain limited

subject-matter detail (for example, counts of people by age

ranges—under 5 years, 5 to 9 years, etc.—rather than by

single years). Report series that include greater amounts

of subject-matter detail include less geographic detail.

Computer Tape Files

The Census Bureau provides more data on tape and

other machine-readable products than in printed reports.

These products are sold by the Census Bureau’s Customer Services. There are several general types of data

files released on computer tape (available on both reels

and cartridges). They are introduced below, and more

information is presented in figures 3 and 4, page F–8.

Summary Tape Files (STF’s)—These computer tape files

provide statistics with greater subject-matter detail than

printed reports. They also present statistics for some types

of areas, such as block groups and blocks, that are not

included in the reports. (See figure 3.)

Here are some important features of STF’s for the Virgin

Islands:

• Each STF presents a particular set of data tables for

specific types of geographic areas.

• An STF may have two file types (indicated by a letter

suffix attached to the STF number) that differ in the

geographic levels reported, but contain the same data

detail.

• STF 1 contains population and housing counts and basic

or stateside 100-percent equivalent population (age,

race, sex, marital status, relationship, Hispanic origin)

and housing (tenure and vacancy data) characteristics.

There are two files:

File A contains data for the Virgin Islands and its

component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/

census subdistrict/ place/ BNA/ block group.

File B contains data for the Virgin Islands and its

component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/

census subdistrict/ place/ BNA/ block group/ block.

DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F–1
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 155 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

• STF 2 contains more detailed data on the basic population and housing characteristics than those shown in

STF 1. The file provides data for the Virgin Islands in a

geographic hierarchy of island/ island subdivision/ place/

block numbering area (BNA). It also presents BNA

summaries for split BNA’s. The file includes records for

the total population and iterations for race and Hispanic

origin.

• STF 3 contains demographic, social, economic, and

housing characteristics. The file provides data for the

Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic

hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/ place/ BNA/ block

group.

• STF 4 contains more detailed distributions of the population and housing characteristics than those shown in

STF 3. This file includes records for the total population

and iterations for race and Hispanic origin. It will provide

data for BNA’s in the Virgin Islands in a geographic

hierarchy of island/ island subdivision/ place/ BNA. It also

presents BNA summaries for split BNA’s.

Public Use Microdata Sample (PUMS) File—This computer tape file (see figure 4) contains data from samples of

housing-unit records (‘‘microdata’’). Each sample housingunit record includes essentially all the 1990 census data

collected about each person in a sample household and

the characteristics of the housing unit. Information that

could be used to identify an individual or a housing unit is

not included in the file.

The microdata file enables users to prepare customized

tabulations and cross-tabulations of most items on the

census questionnaire. There is one PUMS file for the Virgin

Islands. It presents a 10-percent sample of housing units.

Flexible Diskettes

STF’s and the PUMS file for the Virgin Islands also will

be offered on flexible diskettes (‘‘floppies’’) for IBM and

compatible microcomputers using the PC DOS 1.1 or

higher operating systems.

Microfiche

Block statistics are available on microfiche that present,

in table format, a subset of the tabulations for census

blocks found in STF 1B (see figure 3). In the 1990 census,

for the first time, the Census Bureau block-numbered the

entire Virgin Islands. This greatly increases the number of

small areas for which the Census Bureau provides 1990

census data for the Virgin Islands.

STF’s 1A and 3 are available on microfiche as well. As

noted in figure 3, they provide data for a variety of

geographic areas. Also, printed reports are available on

microfiche from Customer Services soon after they are

published.

Online Information Systems

The Census Bureau began CENDATATM, its online

information service, in 1984. CENDATATM is accessible

through two information vendors, CompuServe and DIALOG. A number of Census Bureau reports, in whole or in

part, are offered online. For the 1990 census, CENDATATM

provides up-to-date information about the availability of

data products and carries selections of data from STF’s 1

and 3.

Custom Data Products

These products are for users who require unique tabulations that are not included in standard products; for

example, information for locally defined geographic areas.

Users also can order special microdata files.

The cost of preparing custom products must be paid by

the users who request them. Any data that the Census

Bureau provides in these products are subject to the same

standards applied to other data to ensure that confidential

individual information is not revealed.

User-Defined Areas Program (UDAP) Tabulations—

UDAP can provide data for locally defined areas that do

not correspond to standard 1990 census geographic areas.

Users identify the geographic areas of interest to them by

delineating boundaries around groupings of census blocks

on 1990 census County Block Maps or by electronically

submitting the geographic components of their area of

interest. (A contact for more information is given in the

‘‘Sources of Assistance’’ section.)

Special Tabulations—The Census Bureau can prepare

special data tabulations for any specific geographic or

subject-matter area. Users should rely on standard reports,

tapes, microfiche, diskettes, or user-defined area tabulations whenever possible, since special tabulations tend to

be substantially more expensive and take time to arrange

and produce. (Contacts for more information are given in

the ‘‘Sources of Assistance’’ section.)

GEOGRAPHIC PRODUCTS

Maps

Census Bureau maps are necessary for virtually all uses

of small-area 1990 census data. They are needed to locate

the specific geographic areas for which the census provides data and to study the spatial relationship of the data

for analytic purposes. The Census Bureau prepares a

variety of 1990 census maps for the Virgin Islands. Among

the most useful are these three series:

County Block Maps (1990)—These maps show census

blocks and their numbers; boundaries for statistical and

legally defined entities, such as census subdistricts, places,

F–2 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 152 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

and block numbering areas; and physical features. The

maps are prepared on electrostatic plotters by island (the

Virgin Islands’ equivalent of a county for reporting statistics), with one or more map sheets each, depending on the

size and shape of the area and the density of the block

pattern. Data users may purchase these maps from Customer Services.

County Subdivision Outline Map—This map of the Virgin

Islands shows the islands (the equivalent of counties for

reporting statistics) and the names and boundaries of the

census subdistricts and places. Electrostatic-plotter copies

are available for purchase from Customer Services. The

map, in page size, also appears in the following Virgin

Islands census reports: 1990 CPH-1-55, 1990 CPH-2-55,

1990 CPH-5-55, 1990 CP-1-55, 1990 CP-2-55, 1990 CH-1-

55, and 1990 CH-2-55.

Census Tract/ Block Numbering Area (BNA) Outline

Maps—Maps in this island-based series depict BNA boundaries and numbers (there are no census tracts in the Virgin

Islands), the features underlying these boundaries, and the

names and boundaries of the census subdistricts and

places. Customer Services sells electrostatic-plotter copies, and the Superintendent of Documents sells printed

copies.

Geographic Publications

The Geographic Identification Code Scheme report in

the 1990 CPH-R series shows the 1990 census geographic area codes and Federal Information Processing

Standards (FIPS) codes, as appropriate, for the Virgin

Islands and its islands, island subdivisions, and places, as

well as for States, Puerto Rico, the Pacific Outlying Areas,

and other entities, along with some descriptive information

about the codes. The code scheme also is offered on

computer tape.

Machine-Readable Geographic Files

All 1990 census summary tape files include 1990 census geographic area codes, FIPS codes, certain area

names, land and total water area in square kilometers,

geographic coordinates for an internal point for each

entity, and other geographic information.

The Census Bureau developed an automated geographic data base, known as the TIGER (Topologically

Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing) System, to produce the geographic products for the 1990

census. TIGER provides coordinate-based digital map

information for the Virgin Islands, the entire United States,

Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas.

The TIGER System has significantly improved the utility

of 1990 census maps and geographic reference products.

Extract files generated from the TIGER System permit

users, with appropriate software, to perform such tasks as

linking the statistical data in the STF’s and displaying

selected characteristics on maps or a video display screen

at different scales and with whatever boundaries they

select for any geographic area included in TIGER. For

example, a map for a particular island could show the

distribution of the population selected by age groups by

block.

The first extract of selected geographic and cartographic information intended for computer applications,

such as plotting maps and building geographic information

systems, is called the TIGER/ LineTM files. TIGER/ LineTM

files contain attributes for the segments of each boundary

and feature (for example, roads and rivers), including 1990

census geographic codes for adjacent areas, latitude/ longitude coordinates of segment end points and the curvature of segments, the name and type of the feature, and

the relevant census feature class code identifying the

feature segment by category. TIGER/ LineTM files also

provide the names of landmarks, such as lakes and

cemeteries, and include other information.

TIGER/ LineTM files and other TIGER System extracts,

such as TIGER/ BoundaryTM and TIGER/ SDTSTM (Spatial

Data Transfer Standard), are released on computer tape

and, in some cases, CD-ROM. For information on TIGER

extract files, contact Customer Services.

REFERENCE MATERIALS

The Census Bureau issues several reference publications for data users. Some are sold by the Superintendent

of Documents; others are distributed free by Customer

Services. Addresses and phone numbers for the Superintendent of Documents and Customer Services are given in

the following section.

• 1990 Census of Population and Housing Tabulation and

Publication Program for the Virgin Islands of the United

States. A free report describing 1990 census products

for the Virgin Islands, comparing 1990 products with

those of the 1980 census, and more. Request from

Customer Services.

• 1990 Census of Population and Housing Tabulation and

Publication Program. A free report describing 1990

census products for the States, comparing 1990 products with those of the 1980 census, and more. Request

from Customer Services.

• Census ABC’s—Applications in Business and Community. A free booklet that highlights key information about

the 1990 census and illustrates a variety of ways the

data can be used. Request from Customer Services.

• TIGER: The Coast-to-Coast Digital Map Data Base. A

free booklet describing the structure and uses of the

Census Bureau’s TIGER System. Request from Customer Services.

• Census and You. The Census Bureau’s monthly newsletter for data users. It reports on the latest 1990 census

developments, selected new publications and computer

DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F–3
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 155 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

tape files, other censuses and surveys, developments in

services to users, and upcoming conferences and training courses. Subscriptions are sold by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

• Monthly Product Announcement. A free monthly listing

of all new Census Bureau publications; microfiche; maps;

data files on tape, diskettes, or CD-ROM; and technical

documentation. To subscribe, contact Customer Services.

• Census Catalog and Guide. A comprehensive annual

description of data products, statistical programs, and

services of the Census Bureau. It provides abstracts of

the publications, data files, microfiche, maps, and items

online. In addition, the Catalog/ Guide offers such features as information about censuses and surveys and

telephone contact lists of data specialists at the Census

Bureau, the State Data Centers, and other data processing service centers. It is sold by the Superintendent of

Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

Users also can get listings of new Census Bureau

products, updated daily, by subscribing to the Daily List.

This information and selected statistics are available online

through CENDATATM, the Census Bureau’s online information service. For more information, contact Customer

Services.

SOURCES OF ASSISTANCE

U.S. Bureau of the Census

The Census Bureau’s Customer Services sells most of

the machine-readable data products, microfiche, and maps

described earlier. (The 1990 census printed reports are

sold by the Superintendent of Documents, as noted below.)

Also, users may consult with specialists at the Census

Bureau’s Washington headquarters and the New York

Regional Office, which serves the Virgin Islands. From time

to time, the specialists also conduct workshops, seminars,

and training courses.

Washington, DC Contacts—To order products, for a

telephone contacts list of Census Bureau specialists, and

for general information: Customer Services, U.S. Bureau of

the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-

4100 (FAX number, 301-763-4794).

For User-Defined Areas Program (UDAP) information:

UDAP Staff, Decennial Management Division, U.S. Bureau

of the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-

4282.

For special tabulation information: Population—Rosemarie Cowan, Population Division, U.S. Bureau of the

Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-5476;

Housing—William Downs, Housing and Household Economic Statistics Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census,

Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-8553.

Regional Office Contact—

New York, NY 212-264-4730

Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government

Printing Office

The Superintendent of Documents handles the sale of

most of the Federal Government’s publications, including

1990 census reports. To order reports and for information:

Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing

Office, Washington, DC 20402, telephone 202-783-3238.

Other Sources of Products and Services

State Data Center—The Census Bureau furnishes data

products, training in data access and use, technical assistance, and consultation to the Virgin Islands, all States, the

District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Guam. Data centers,

in turn, offer publications for reference, printouts from

computer tape, specially prepared reports, maps, and

other products and assistance to data users. The lead

agency of the Virgin Islands data center program is the

Eastern Caribbean Center, University of the Virgin Islands,

Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas, VI 00802, telephone 809-

776-9200, ext. 1238. For a list of all State Data Centers,

see the Census Catalog and Guide or contact Customer

Services.

National Clearinghouse—The National Clearinghouse for

Census Data Services is a listing of private companies and

other organizations that offer assistance in obtaining and

using data released by the Census Bureau. For a list of

participants in the National Clearinghouse, see the Census

Catalog and Guide or contact Customer Services.

Depository Libraries—There are 1,400 libraries in the

United States, Virgin Islands, and other areas that receive

(from the Government Printing Office) Federal publications

that they think their patrons will need. Often some of these

publications are Census Bureau reports. The Census Bureau

provides free reports to an additional 120 census depository libraries. Also, many libraries purchase census reports

and maps for their areas. The Census Catalog and Guide

includes a list of all depository libraries.

OTHER CENSUS BUREAU RESOURCES

The Census Bureau has more to offer than just the

results of the census of population and housing for the

Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, and the

Pacific Outlying Areas. Through other censuses, surveys,

and estimates programs, it compiles and issues (in reports,

computer tape, and other media) data for the United States

and sometimes the Virgin Islands, Puerto Rico, and the

Pacific Outlying Areas on subjects as diverse as appliance

sales, neighborhood conditions, and exports to other countries. Here are examples of the information published

about—

F–4 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 151 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

• People: Age, race, sex, income, poverty, child care, child

support, fertility, noncash benefits, education, commuting habits, pension coverage, unemployment, ancestry.

• Business and industry: Number of employees, total

payroll, sales and receipts, products manufactured or

sold.

• Housing and construction: Value of new construction,

numbers of owners and renters, property value or rent

paid, housing starts, fuels used, mortgage costs.

• Farms: Number, acreage, livestock, crop sales.

• Governments: Revenues and expenditures, taxes, employment, pension funds.

• Foreign trade: Exports and imports, origin and destination, units shipped.

• Other nations: Population, birth rates, death rates, literacy, fertility.

The other censuses, such as agriculture, retail trade,

manufactures, and governments, are collected for years

ending in ‘‘2’’ and ‘‘7.’’ Survey and estimates programs

generate results as often as every month.

Many of the monthly ‘‘economic indicators’’ that measure how the Nation is doing come directly or indirectly

from the Census Bureau. Examples: employment and

unemployment; housing starts; wholesale and retail trade;

manufactures’ shipments, inventories, and orders; export

and import trade; and sales of single-family homes.

Statistical activities of the Census Bureau relevant to

the Virgin Islands are described below. Data users will find

more information about them and descriptions of their data

products in the annual Census Catalog and Guide. Also,

special guides and brochures are prepared for most of

them. Contact the Census Bureau’s Customer Services for

more information.

Economic Censuses and Surveys

The economic censuses provide statistics about business establishments once every 5 years, covering years

ending in ‘‘2’’ and ‘‘7.’’ The 1987 Economic Censuses

include the censuses of retail trade, wholesale trade,

service industries, transportation, manufactures, mineral

industries, and construction industries.

Several key statistics are tabulated for all industries

covered in the censuses. They are number of establishments, number of employees, payroll, and measure of

output (sales or receipts, and value of shipments or of work

done). Other items vary from sector to sector.

Agriculture Census

The agriculture census is conducted every 5 years (for

years ending in 2 and 7) in the Virgin Islands. It is the only

source of uniform agriculture data at the island level. It

provides data on such subjects as the number and size of

farms; land use and ownership; livestock, poultry, and

crops; and value of products sold.

Foreign Trade Statistics

Monthly U.S. merchandise trade data compiled by the

Census Bureau summarize export and import transactions

and are based on the official documents filed by shippers

and receivers. These figures reflect the flow of merchandise but not intangibles like services and financial commitments. The trade figures trace commodity movements out

of and into the U.S. Customs jurisdiction, which includes

the Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico as well as the 50 States

and the District of Columbia. Data are published separately

on trade between the United States, the Virgin Islands,

Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas.

Other Statistical Activities

The Census Bureau also offers international data. It

maintains an international data base, which is available to

the public on computer tape and is used to produce the

biennial World Population Profile report. It prepares studies

dealing with the demographic and economic characteristics of other countries and world regions.

Statistical compendia are another important data product. These publications (sometimes also offered in machinereadable form) draw data from many sources and reorganize them for convenient use. The most widely used

compendia are the annual Statistical Abstract of the United

States, the County and City Data Book (published every 5

years), and the State and Metropolitan Area Data Book

(published approximately every 4 years).

DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F–5
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 151 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

Figure 1. Content of the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands of the United States

BASIC SUBJECTS *

Population Housing

Household relationship Number of units in structure

Sex Number of rooms in unit

Race Tenure—owned or rented

Age Value of home or monthly rent

Marital status Congregate housing (meals included in rent)

Hispanic origin Vacancy characteristics

DETAILED SUBJECTS *

Population Housing

Social characteristics: Year householder moved into residence

Place of birth, citizenship, and year of entry into the

Virgin Islands

Number of bedrooms

Complete plumbing and complete kitchen facilities

Education—enrollment and attainment Telephone in unit

Ancestry Vehicles available

Migration (residence in 1985) Cooking fuel

Language spoken at home Source of water and method of sewage disposal

Veteran status Purchase of water from water vendor

Disability Year structure built

Fertility Condominium status

Farm residence

Economic characteristics: Shelter costs, including utilities

Labor force

Place of work and journey to work

Year last worked

Occupation, industry, and class of worker

Work experience in 1989

Income in 1989

*In the Virgin Islands, all questions were asked of all persons and of all housing units. The basic subjects are equivalent to the stateside 100-percent

subjects and the detailed subjects are equivalent to the stateside sample subjects.

F–6 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 151 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

Figure 2. 1990 Census Printed Reports for the Virgin Islands of the United States

Series Title Description Geographic areas

1990 CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING (1990 CPH)

1990 CPH-1-55 Summary Population and Housing

Characteristics

Population and housing unit counts,

and summary statistics on age, sex,

race, Hispanic origin, household relationship, units in structure, number of

rooms, tenure, value and rent, and

vacancy characteristics

Virgin Islands and its islands, census

subdistricts, and places

1990 CPH-2-55 Population and

Housing Unit

Counts

Total population and housing unit

counts for 1990 and previous censuses

Virgin Islands; its islands, census subdistricts, and places; and summary

geographic areas

1990 CPH-3-55 Population and

Housing Characteristics for Census Tracks and

Block Numbering

Areas

Statistics on most of the population

and housing subjects

Statistics presented in a geographic

hierarchy of Virgin Islands—island—

place—block numbering area

1990 CPH-5-55 Summary Social,

Economic, and

Housing Characteristics

Statistics on population and housing

subjects

Virgin Islands and its islands, census

subdistricts, and places

1990 CENSUS OF POPULATION (1990 CP)

1990 CP-1-55 General Population

Characteristics

Detailed statistics on age, sex, race,

Hispanic origin, marital status, and

household relationship characteristics

Virgin Islands; its islands, census subdistricts, and places; and summary

geographic areas

1990 CP-2-55 Social and Economic CharacteristicsStatistics generally on population subjectsVirgin Islands; its islands, census subdistricts, and places; and summary

geographic areas

1990 CENSUS OF HOUSING (1990 CH)

1990 CH-1-55 General Housing

Characteristics

Detailed statistics on units in structure, value and rent, number of

rooms, tenure, and vacancy characteristics

Virgin Islands; its islands, census subdistricts, and places; and summary

geographic areas

1990 CH-2-55 Detailed Housing

Characteristics

Statistics generally on housing subjectsVirgin Islands; its islands, census subdistricts, and places; and summary

geographic areas

DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F–7
 JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 154 OUTPUT: Wed Feb 24 15:05:09 1993 / node2/ F main F / 90dec/ all/ 55/ appf

Figure 3. 1990 Census Summary Tape Files for the Virgin Islands of the United States

Summary Tape File

(STF 1A, 1B, etc.) Geographic areas Description

STF 1

A1 Virgin Islands and its component areas

in a geographic hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/ place/ block numbering

area (BNA)/ block group (BG) Over 700 cells/ items of basic population and housing counts and characteristics for each geographic B area 1 Virgin Islands of the United States and

its component areas in a geographic

hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/

place/ BNA/ BG/ block

STF 2 A Virgin Islands and its component areas

in a geographic hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/ place/ BNA. It also presents BNA summaries for split BNA’s.

Over 2,000 cells/ items of basic population and housing counts and characteristics for each geographic

area. The STF 2 file will include a set of tabulations

for the total population and separate presentations

of tabulations by race and Hispanic origin

STF 3 A1 Virgin Islands and its component areas

in a geographic hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/ place/ BNA/ BG

Over 2,600 cells/ items of detailed population and

housing characteristics for each geographic area

STF 4 A Data for BNA’s and larger areas in the

Virgin Islands in a geographic hierarchy

of island/ census subdistrict/ place/ BNA.

It also presents BNA summaries for

split BNA’s.

Several thousand cells/ items of detailed population

and housing characteristics for each geographic

area. The STF 4 file will include a set of tabulations

for the total population and separate presentations

of tabulations by race and Hispanic origin

1

Also available on microfiche. STF 1B microfiche provides only part of the data for blocks and other areas in the tape file.

Figure 4. Other 1990 Census Data Products for the Virgin Islands of the United States

Title Description Geographic areas

Special Supplementary

Report

A series of cross-tabulations of detailed population and housing data Virgin Islands

Census/ Equal Opportunity (EEO) Special FileSample tabulations showing detailed occupations and educational attainment data by age;

cross tabulations by sex, Hispanic origin, and

race

Virgin Islands

Public Use Microdata

Sample (PUMS) File

Machine-readable file containing a sample of

individual census records showing most population and housing characteristics but with

identifying information removed

10 Percent—PUMS

Area

Virgin Islands

User-Defined Areas

Tabulations

Sample data provided on printouts, tapes, or

other products, with maps and narrative (if

requested)

User-defined areas created by aggregating

census blocks

Special Tabulations User-defined tabulations for specified geographic areas provided on printouts, tapes, or

other products

User-defined areas or standard areas

F–8 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE
Maps are not available.

U.S. Census Bureau